unfoldingWord_en_tn/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv

459 KiB
Raw Blame History

1BookChapterVerseIDSupportReferenceOrigQuoteOccurrenceGLQuoteOccurrenceNote
2HEBfrontintroxy4n0# Introduction to Hebrews\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of Hebrews\n\nHebrews alternates between exposition and exhortation. To put it another way, the author switches between teaching and warning his audience. The following outline identifies which sections are which. \n\n1. Introduction: God and his Son (1:14)\n2. The Son and the angels (1:52:18)\n * Teaching: The Son is greater than the angels (1:514)\n * Exhortation: Listen to the message! (2:14)\n * Teaching: The Son becomes lower than the angels to help his brothers (2:518)\n3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:14:13)\n * Exhortation: The Son is greater than Moses (3:16)\n * Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:74:11)\n * Exhortation: The power of Gods word (4:1213)\n4. Summary statement (4:1416)\n5. The Son as high priest (5:110:18)\n * Teaching: The Son becomes high priest (5:110)\n * Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:116:12)\n * Exhortation: Gods promise is certain (6:1320)\n * Teaching: Melchizedek the priest (7:110)\n * Teaching: The Son is high priest in the order of Melchizedek (7:1128)\n * Teaching: The ministry of the Son (8:16)\n * Teaching: The new covenant (8:713)\n * Teaching: Old and new ministries (9:110:18)\n6. Summary statement (10:1925)\n7. Faith and endurance (10:2612:29)\n * Exhortation: Endure in the faith! (10:2639)\n * Exhortation: Examples of faith (11:140)\n * Exhortation: Imitate Jesus in rejecting sin and enduring discipline (12:117)\n * Exhortation: Mount Sinai and Mount Zion (12:1829)\n8. Closing (13:125)\n * Final commands and exhortations (13:119)\n * Benediction and letter closing (13:2025)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Hebrews?\n\nNo one knows who wrote Hebrews. Scholars have suggested several different people who could possibly be the author. Possible authors are Paul, Luke, and Barnabas. The date of writing is also not known. Most scholars think it was written before A.D. 70. Jerusalem was destroyed in A.D. 70, but the writer of this letter spoke about Jerusalem as if it had not yet been destroyed.\n\n### What is the Book of Hebrews about?\n\nIn the Book of Hebrews, the author shows that Jesus fulfilled Old Testament prophecies. The author did this in order to encourage the Jewish Christians and to explain that Jesus is better than anything that the old covenant had to offer. Jesus is the perfect High Priest. Jesus was also the perfect sacrifice. Animal sacrifices became useless because Jesus sacrifice was once and for all time. Therefore, Jesus is the one and only way for people to be accepted by God.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Hebrews.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Letter to the Hebrews” or “A Letter to the Jewish Christians.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### Can readers understand this book without knowing about the sacrifices and the work of the priests required in the Old Testament?\n\nIt would be very difficult for readers to understand this book without understanding these matters. Translators might consider explaining some of these Old Testament concepts in notes or in an introduction to this book.\n\n### How is the idea of blood used in the Book of Hebrews?\n\nBeginning in [Hebrews 9:7](../heb/09/07.md), the idea of blood is often used as metonymy to represent the death of any animal that was sacrificed according to Gods covenant with Israel. The author also used blood to represent the death of Jesus Christ. Jesus became the perfect sacrifice so that God would forgive people for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\nBeginning in [Hebrews 9:19](../heb/09/19.md), the author used the idea of sprinkling as a symbolic action. Old Testament priests sprinkled the blood of the animals sacrificed. This was a symbol of the benefits of the animals death being applied to the people or to an object. This showed that the people or the object was acceptable to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Hebrews in the ULT?\n\nThe scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”\n* Sometimes the meaning indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:10; 13:24)\n* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 2:11: 9:13; 10:10, 14, 29; 13:12)\n\nThe UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.\n\n### How should “we” and “you” be translated?\n\nThroughout the letter, “we” includes the author and the audience unless a note specifies otherwise. Similarly, “you” is always plural unless a note specifies otherwise. \n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Hebrews?\n\nFor the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.\n* “you crowned him with glory and honor” (2:7). Some older versions read, “you crowned him with glory and honor and you have put him over the works of your hands.”\n* “those who did not unite in faith with those who obeyed” (4:2). Some older versions read, “those who heard it without joining faith to it.”\n* “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that have come” (9:11). Some modern versions and older versions read, “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that are to come.”\n* “on those who were prisoners” (10:34). Some older versions read, “of me in my chains.”\n* “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were killed with the sword” (11:37). Some older versions read, “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were tempted. They were killed with the sword.”\n* “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned” (12:20). Some older versions read, “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned or shot with an arrow.”\n\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3HEB1introaaf90# Hebrews 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Introduction: God and his Son (1:14)<br>2. The Son and the angels (1:52:18)<br> * Teaching: The Son is greater than the angels (1:514)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [1:5](../01/05.md), [713](../01/07.md), which are quotations from books of poetry in the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### God speaking Scripture<br><br>In this chapter, the author quotes the Old Testament seven times. Each time, he says that God is the one who speaks the words, and God speaks them to or about the Son or the angels. The audience would have recognized that these quotations came from the Old Testament, but the author wished to introduce them as words that God himself said and says. He can do this because he believed that God is the author of the entire Old Testament, since he is the one who spoke through the prophets (see [1:1](../01/01.md)). In your translation, you should express these quotations as words that God says. If your readers would not recognize that God is speaking quotations from the Old Testament, you could identify the quotations for your readers in footnotes or in some other way. <br><br>### Old Testament quotations<br><br>When the author quotes from the Old Testament, he uses a Greek translation that is sometimes different than the original Hebrew version that most modern translations use for the Old Testament. This is particularly obvious in [1:6](../01/06.md), which quotes from the Greek version of [Deuteronomy 32:43](../../deu/32/43.md). In other places, the author may paraphrase or loosely quote the Old Testament. Since the author chose to use these forms of the quotations, you should represent the words the author uses, not the words that may be found in an Old Testament you are familiar with. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])<br><br>### The Son and the Father<br><br>In this chapter, the author refers to the “Son” and several times speaks of God as a “father.” These are important terms for two person of the Trinity: God the Father and God the Son. The author uses these terms partly because the Old Testament texts he quotes use them. Also, “Son” and “Father” refer to two people who are closely related but not the same person, so the words provide good language to speak about two persons of the Trinity. If possible, preserve the father and son language in this chapter, but make sure that your translation does not make it sound like the Son did not exist until a certain time or that the Father at some point physically gave birth to the Son. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])<br><br>### Angels<br><br>The author mentions “angels” many times in this chapter. In his culture, everyone knew about “angels.” They were spiritual beings who could appear in human form. Some people talked about good and evil angels. The author only speaks about the good angels in this chapter. These angels serve and worship God, and they do whatever God tells them to do. Some scholars think that the author is arguing against people who said that Jesus was an angel. More likely, the author wishes to prove that Jesus the Son is God, and he uses the angels to do that. The author thinks that the angels are between humans and God in power and position. If the Son is above the angels, that means he must be God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/angel]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>The author asks rhetorical questions in [1:5](../01/05.md), [1314](../01/13.md). He is not asking these questions because he wants the audience to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the audience to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with the author. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### Parallelisms<br><br>In the Old Testament, good poetry often included two parallel lines that expressed one idea in two different ways. When the author quotes the Old Testament, he often includes this kind of parallelism. Since both lines contribute to the meaning of the idea, it is best to preserve the parallelism. If your readers would find it confusing, however, you could combine the two parallel lines into one idea. See the notes on each instance of parallel lines for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])<br><br>### Inheriting<br><br>In [1:2](../01/02.md), [4](../01/04.md), [14](../01/14.md), the author uses language related to “inheriting” or being an “heir.” In the authors culture, children often “inherited” property or money when their parents died. In these verses, the author uses the “inheriting” language metaphorically to refer to receiving something from God. In this chapter, the metaphor does not imply that someone must die for the person to “inherit.” If possible, preserve this metaphor since it is an important concept in Hebrews. See the notes on each verse for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Descriptions of the Son in [1:3](../01/03.md)<br><br>In [1:3](../01/03.md), the author describes the Son as “the brightness of Gods glory” and the “exact representation of Gods being.” Both of these phrases identify the Son as God and as unique. In other words, these phrases are the authors way of saying that the Son is God, but God is not just the Son. Carefully consider how you translate these phrases, and be sure that your translation makes it clear that the Son is God but God is not just the Son. The author uses images and metaphors to express the idea, so consider using similar images and metaphors.
4HEB11dhcrfigs-doubletπολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως πάλαι1Here, **In many portions** shows that God did not speak just once. Rather, he spoke often throughout the time called **long ago**. Then, **in many ways** shows that God used various means and people to speak to the **fathers**. The author uses both of these phrases because he wishes to emphasize the variety of times and ways in which God has **spoken**. If your language does not use repetition for emphasis, and if you cannot represent Pauls two phrases well, you could express the idea using one phrase that emphasizes variety. Alternate translation: “Long ago, with great variety” or “Long ago, using multiple methods in different times,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
5HEB11c7usfigs-infostructureπολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως πάλαι, ὁ Θεὸς, λαλήσας τοῖς πατράσιν ἐν τοῖς προφήταις1Here, **In many portions and in many ways long ago** describes how God “spoke” **to {our} fathers**. If your readers would misunderstand this sentence structure, you could rearrange the phrases so that **In many portions and in many ways long ago** does modify **having spoken**. Alternate translation: “God, having spoken to {our} fathers through the prophets in many portions and in many ways long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
6HEB11uuixfigs-idiomπάλαι1Here, **long ago** refers to past time. It often identifies events that happened in the distant past and about which stories are told. Use a word or phrase that refers to the distant past. Alternate translation: “in the past days” or “in ancient times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7HEB11ct15grammar-connect-time-sequentialλαλήσας1Here, **having spoken** introduces an action that took place before the actions that take place in the next verse ([1:2](../01/02.md)). Use a form that introduces action that takes place before something else. Alternate translation: “after speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
8HEB11in2ctranslate-kinshipτοῖς πατράσιν1Here, **{our} fathers** refers to the Israelites who were alive before Jesus lived on earth. Not all the audience were descended from these Israelites. However, the author can still refer to the Israelites as their **fathers** because he thinks that all Christians have been included in the family of Abraham, the ancestor of the Israelites. If possible, preserve the family language in your translation. Alternate translation: “our forefathers” or “to the Israelite ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
9HEB12f3z1figs-parallelismἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τῶν ἡμερῶν τούτων, ἐλάλησεν ἡμῖν ἐν Υἱῷ, ὃν1The author uses words and phrases in this clause that make its structure parallel to the previous verse ([1:1](../01/01.md)). He does this to emphasize the contrast between “long ago” and **at {the} last of these days**. If possible, use the same structures in this clause as you did in the last verse. Alternate translation: “has spoken to use through a Son at {the} last of these days. This Son is the one whom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
10HEB12scr8figs-idiomἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τῶν ἡμερῶν τούτων1in these last daysHere, **{the} last of these days** refers to the last period in the history of the world, which began when Jesus lived, died, and came alive again. It also means that this last period has been the goal of all the previous events. If your language has a way to refer to the last period in the history of the world, you could use it here. Alternatively, if your language has a way to refer to the end of the world, you could express the idea by stating that the end of the world will happen soon. Alternate translation: “during this time when the end of the world is coming soon” or “in these end times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11HEB12d386guidelines-sonofgodprinciplesΥἱῷ1through a SonHere, **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
12HEB12i93zfigs-possessionκληρονόμον πάντων1to be the heir of all thingsHere the author uses the possessive form to indicate that the **heir** receives or inherits **all things**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could use a word or phrase such as “receive” or “inherit.” Alternate translation: “the heir who inherits all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
13HEB12ovmcfigs-metaphorἔθηκεν κληρονόμον πάντων1Here the author speaks as if Jesus were child who would receive property that a parent passes on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus is the **Son** who will “inherit” **all things**, which means that he will rule over everything that exists. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “he appointed to be the one who will rule over all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
14HEB12gqj8translate-unknownτοὺς αἰῶνας1It is through him that God also made the universeHere, **the ages** refers primarily to all the time periods that together make up the history of the world. However, **ages** can also refer to everything that God created that exists during those time periods. If possible, use a word or phrase that refers to everything that exists during all of time. Alternate translation: “everything that has existed and will exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
15HEB13xvinfigs-infostructureὃς ὢν ἀπαύγασμα τῆς δόξης καὶ χαρακτὴρ τῆς ὑποστάσεως αὐτοῦ, φέρων τε τὰ πάντα τῷ ῥήματι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ, καθαρισμὸν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ποιησάμενος, ἐκάθισεν ἐν δεξιᾷ τῆς Μεγαλωσύνης ἐν ὑψηλοῖς1Here the author includes a long description of who the “Son” is. The phrases **being the brightness of {his} glory and exact representation of his being** and **upholding all the {things} by the word of his power** describe what the “Son” always is and does. The phrase **having made cleansing for sins** refers more specifically to what the “Son” has done and completed before he **sat down at the right hand**. If your readers would misunderstand that the phrase **having made purification for sins** refers to something that happened before **sat down**, while the previous phrases all refer to things that the “Son” always is and does, you could make the relationships clearer. Alternate translation: “who is the brightness of {his} glory and exact representation of his being and who upholds all the {things} by the word of his power. After having made purification for sins, he sat down at the right of the Majesty on high” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
16HEB13he0efigs-abstractnounsἀπαύγασμα τῆς δόξης καὶ χαρακτὴρ τῆς ὑποστάσεως αὐτοῦ1If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **brightness**, **glory**, **representation**, and **being**, you could express the ideas by using verbs, adjectives, or adverbs. Alternate translation: “brightly glorious like he is and exactly representing who he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
17HEB13hn4qfigs-metaphorἀπαύγασμα τῆς δόξης καὶ1the brightness of Gods gloryHere the author speaks as if the “Son” had the **brightness** that belongs to Gods **glory**, which is pictured here like a bright light. The author speaks in this way to emphasize that the Son “shines” with the **glory** that only God has. He means that the “Son” is God and represents God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “the reflection of {his} glory and” or “one who has the glory of God and the” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18HEB13b7jctranslate-unknownχαρακτὴρ τῆς ὑποστάσεως αὐτοῦ1glory, the exact representation of his beingHere, **exact representation** refers to something that perfects shows or matches what something else is like. In this case, the “Son” perfects shows or matches Gods **being**, that is, what God is like. The author uses **exact representation of his being** to show that the “Son” is God along with God the Father but not the same person. You could use a word or phrase that indicates that the “Son” is just like what God the Father is like. Alternate translation: “exactly like what he is like” or “perfectly representing who God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
19HEB13kmzafigs-metaphorφέρων…τὰ πάντα1Here the author speaks as if the Son were standing underneath **all the {things}** and holding them up so that they did not fall. He speaks in this way to indicate that everything continues to exist only because the Son works to make it continue. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “preserving all the {things}” or “supporting all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20HEB13ms8zfigs-metonymyτῷ ῥήματι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ1the word of his powerHere, **word** refers to speaking “words” or “messages.” It does not refer to one word that the Son speaks. If your readers would misunderstand **word**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how the Son speaks. Alternate translation: “through his powerful speech” or “by how he speaks with power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21HEB13mk26figs-abstractnounsτῷ ῥήματι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **power**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “by his powerful word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
22HEB13l1pgfigs-abstractnounsκαθαρισμὸν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ποιησάμενος1After he had made cleansing for sinsIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **purification**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “cleanse” or “purify.” Alternate translation: “having cleansed us from our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
23HEB13f729figs-abstractnounsτῶν ἁμαρτιῶν1he had made cleansing for sinsIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sins**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “sin.” Alternate translation: “for how we have sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
24HEB13xij7translate-symactionἐκάθισεν ἐν δεξιᾷ1he sat down at the right hand of the Majesty on highWhen someone sits **at {the} right** of God, it symbolizes that persons honor, authority, and ability to rule. If your readers would misunderstand what **sat down at {the} right** means, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sat down to rule at the right” or “he took the place of honor and authority at the right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
25HEB13uym0figs-synecdocheἐν δεξιᾷ τῆς Μεγαλωσύνης1Here, **at {the} right** refers to the place next to a persons **right** hand, which would be the “right side.” In the authors culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If your readers would misunderstand **at {the} right**, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that the Son has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at the right side of the Majesty” or “in the honorable place next to the Majesty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
26HEB13ir7xfigs-euphemismτῆς Μεγαλωσύνης1the Majesty on highIn the authors culture, it was considered reverent to avoid saying Gods name. Here the author uses **Majesty** instead of Gods name in order to follow this custom and to indicate that God is powerful and glorious. If your readers would misunderstand **Majesty**, you could use a reverent way to refer to God in your culture, especially if it emphasizes how God is powerful and glorious. Alternate translation: “of the great deity” or “of the glorious God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
27HEB13awjdtranslate-unknownἐν ὑψηλοῖς1Here, **on high** identifies the location of **{the} right of the Majesty**, which is where the Son **sat down**. This location is in heaven. If your readers would misunderstand **on high**, you could clarify that it means that Jesus ascended into heaven, which is where the **right** side is. Alternate translation: “in heaven” or “on high, in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28HEB14x4bhγενόμενος1He has becomeHere, **having become** could introduce: (1) an explanation of what “sitting at Gods right” side ([1:3](../01/03.md)) means. Alternate translation: “thus, he has become” (2) a result that comes from “sitting at Gods right hand” ([1:3](../01/03.md)). Alternate translation: “so, he has become” or “therefore, he has become”
29HEB14hnabτοσούτῳ κρείττων γενόμενος τῶν ἀγγέλων, ὅσῳ διαφορώτερον παρ’ αὐτοὺς, κεκληρονόμηκεν ὄνομα1Here the author uses a comparison that indicates that the difference in “superiority” between the Son and **the angels** is the same as the difference between the Sons **name** and the names of **the angels**. Consider clear ways to indicate such a comparison in your language. Alternate translation: “having become as much superior to the angels as the name that he has inherited is more excellent than theirs”
30HEB14bn6ttranslate-unknownτοσούτῳ κρείττων…τῶν ἀγγέλων…διαφορώτερον1Here, **far superior** and **more excellent** both refer to how Jesus and Jesuss **name** have more authority and honor than the angels and their names. If your readers would misunderstand **far superior** and **more excellent**, you could use words or phrases that indicate this more clearly. Alternate translation: “more honorable than the angels … more honorable” or “far higher than the angels … a higher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
31HEB14fzg3figs-extrainfoδιαφορώτερον…ὄνομα1as the name he has inherited is more excellent than their nameHere the author does not clarify what **name** this is. It could be the title “Son,” the title “Lord,” the name “Jesus,” or Gods own special name, “Yahweh.” Since the author did not clarify what **name** he is referring to, it is best to refer to a name or title without stating what it is. Alternate translation: “a more excellent title” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
32HEB14qt7qfigs-metaphorκεκληρονόμηκεν1he has inheritedHere the author speaks as if Jesus were child who would receive property that a parent passes on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus receives a **name** from God the Father, although this does not mean that God the Father has died. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “he has received” or “God has given him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
33HEB14uu4sfigs-ellipsisπαρ’ αὐτοὺς1Here the author omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete comparison. He omits these words because he stated them in the first half of the comparison (a **name**). If your language needs these words to make a complete comparison, you could include them here. Alternate translation: “than their names” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
34HEB15d964grammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, **For** introduces the support or basis that proves that the Son is “superior to the angels” ([1:4](../01/04.md)). The supporting statements that **For** introduces can be found in [1:514](../01/05.md). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a support or basis for a claim. Alternate translation: “Here is the proof for that:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
35HEB15ww5hfigs-rquestionτίνι γὰρ εἶπέν ποτε τῶν ἀγγέλων, Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε? καὶ πάλιν, ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν?1For to which of the angels did God ever say, “You are my son … a son to me”?The author does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the answer to both is “none of them,” for God said these words to his own Son. If your readers would misunderstand these questions, you could express the ideas with strong negations. Alternate translation: “For God never said to any of the angels You are my son, and I today I have become your father. And again, I will be as a father to him, and he will be as a son to me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
36HEB15pzkcwriting-quotationsτίνι γὰρ εἶπέν ποτε τῶν ἀγγέλων…καὶ πάλιν1Here the author quotes from important texts, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce them as quotations but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken to his Son, not to angels. However, the audience would have understood that these were quotations from the Old Testament. The first quotation comes from [Psalm 2:7](../../psa/02/07.md), and the second quotation comes from [2 Samuel 7:14](../../2sa/07/14.md). Since the author introduces these quotations as words that God has said to his Son, not to angels, you should introduce these quotations as words that someone has or has not said. If your readers would not know that the quotations are from the Old Testament, you could include footnotes or use some other form to identify the quotations. The phrase **And again** is a normal form that the author uses to connect a second statement to the first statement. Alternate translation: “For to which of the angels did he ever speak … And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
37HEB15wmyyfigs-quotationsεἶπέν ποτε…Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε? καὶ πάλιν, ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν?1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the questions as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “did he ever say that he was his son, today he had fathered him, and again that he would be as a father to him, and that he would be as a son to him?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
38HEB15fdsvtranslate-kinshipΥἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε…ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν1In their original contexts, these two quotations referred to the king of Israel, when he began to rule, as one who became Gods **son**. Thus, God was his **father**. When the author applies these words not to angels but to Jesus, he identifies the **father** as God the Father and the **son** as God the Son. He does not mean that Jesus becomes **son** at some point or begins to exist at some point. Rather, he means that God the Father declares and reveals Jesus to be God the Son. If your readers would misunderstand how the author uses **father** and **son** language, you could include some words or a footnote that clarifies the meaning. Alternate translation: “You are my son, today I have proclaimed that I am your father … I proclaim that I am his father and that he is my son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
39HEB15t48efigs-parallelismΥἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε1You are my son … I have become your fatherHere the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses **son** language, and the other uses “father” language. This was considered good poetry in the authors culture. If your readers would misunderstand the parallelism, and if this would not be good poetry in your culture, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “Today I have fathered you, my son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
40HEB15wkozfigs-yousingularσύ…σε1Because the quotation is referring to one **son**, **You** and **you** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
41HEB15jzhsfigs-parallelismἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν1Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses **father** language, and the other uses **son** language. This was considered good poetry in the authors culture. If your readers would misunderstand the parallelism, and if this would not be good poetry in your culture, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “I will be as a father to him, who is my son” or “he will be as a son to me, his father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
42HEB16u0kmgrammar-connect-logic-contrastδὲ πάλιν1Here, **But** introduces a contrast with the previous verse, which talks about what God has not said to angels. In this verse, the author identifies what God has said to angels. If your readers would misunderstand **But**, you could use a word or phrase that would introduce this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Again, and in contrast,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
43HEB16n7phwriting-quotationsδὲ πάλιν…λέγει1he saysHere the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken to angels about his Son. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from the Greek translation of [Deuteronomy 32:43](../../deu/32/43.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said to the angels, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. The phrase **But again** was a normal way in the authors culture to introduce another quotation. Alternate translation: “Further … God speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
44HEB16wnl5figs-pastforfutureεἰσαγάγῃ…λέγει1Here the author uses the present tense to introduce what God says. He may be referring to a past event (if **brings** refers to the incarnation or the ascension of Jesus) or a future event (if **brings** refers to the return of Jesus at the end). The author uses the present tense to focus on what God **says** rather than when he **says** it. Consider what tense would be appropriate for referring primarily to what a person says. Alternate translation: “he brought … he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
45HEB16llcdfigs-infostructureὅταν δὲ πάλιν εἰσαγάγῃ τὸν πρωτότοκον εἰς τὴν οἰκουμένην, λέγει1Here, **again** could modify: (1) **he says**. In this case, **again** tells the audience that the author is quoting an important text **again**. Alternate translation: “But, when he brings the firstborn into the world, again he says” (2) **he brings**. In this case, **again** tells the audience that the **firstborn** has already been in **the world**, and God is “bringing” him into it **again**. The “bringing” would then refer to how Jesus returns to heaven when he ascends or how he comes back again to earth at the end. Alternate translation: “But, when he again brings the firstborn into the world, he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
46HEB16b4s2figs-metaphorτὸν πρωτότοκον1the firstbornHere, **the firstborn** refers to Jesus. The author refers to him as the **firstborn** to emphasize his importance and authority over everyone else. It does not imply that there was a time before Jesus existed or that God gave birth to him at some point. Rather, it implies that Jesus has adopted siblings, who are everyone who believes in him. If your readers would misunderstand **firstborn**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “his honored Son” or “his first Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
47HEB16lnxsεἰς τὴν οἰκουμένην1Here, **the world** could be: (1) the “world that is coming” (see [2:5](../02/05.md)), which is heaven or the heavenly world. In this case, the verse refers to Jesuss ascension into heaven. Alternate translation: “into the coming world” (2) this world as it currently exists. In this case, the verse refers either to Jesuss incarnation or to his return to earth at the end. Alternate translation: “into our world”
48HEB16w5klfigs-quotationsλέγει, καὶ προσκυνησάτωσαν αὐτῷ πάντες ἄγγελοι Θεοῦ1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “he says that all all {the} angels of God should worship him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
49HEB16b6dyfigs-imperativeκαὶ προσκυνησάτωσαν αὐτῷ πάντες ἄγγελοι Θεοῦ1Here the quotation uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word or phrase such as “need to” or “must.” Alternate translation: “And all {the} angels of God need to worship him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
50HEB17bwuhwriting-quotationsκαὶ πρὸς μὲν τοὺς ἀγγέλους λέγει1Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken about angels. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from the Greek translation of [Psalm 104:4](../../psa/104/04.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said about the angels, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. The word **And** was a normal way in the authors culture to introduce another quotation. Alternate translation: “On the one hand, with regard to the angels, God speaks,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
51HEB17acjdfigs-quotationsλέγει, ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα, καὶ τοὺς λειτουργοὺς αὐτοῦ πυρὸς φλόγα1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “he says that he makes his angels spirits, and his servants flames of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
52HEB17urbifigs-parallelismὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα, καὶ τοὺς λειτουργοὺς αὐτοῦ πυρὸς φλόγα1Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the authors culture. If your readers would misunderstand the parallelism, and if this would not be good poetry in your culture, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “The one who makes his servant angels spirits and flames of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
53HEB17wqd8writing-pronounsὁ ποιῶν…αὐτοῦ…αὐτοῦ1Here, **The one** and **his** refer to God. If your readers would misunderstand to whom these words refer, you could make the reference explicit. Alternate translation: “God makes his … his” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
54HEB17x53nfigs-123personὁ ποιῶν…αὐτοῦ…αὐτοῦ1Here the author has God speaking about himself in the third person. He uses this form because the quotation uses the third person to speak about God, and the author claims that God speaks the quotation. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could clarify that God is speaking about himself. Alternate translation: “I am the one who makes his angels spirits and his servants flames of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
55HEB17u76pπνεύματα1Here, the word translated **spirits** could refer to: (1) “winds,” since the word could mean either **spirits** or “winds” in the authors culture. Alternate translations: “winds” (2) how God made the angels to be “spiritual” beings. Alternate translation: “spiritual beings”
56HEB17isd8figs-metaphorὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα, καὶ τοὺς λειτουργοὺς αὐτοῦ πυρὸς φλόγα1He is the one who makes his angels spirits, and his servants flames of fireHere the quotation speaks as if God turned **his angels** into **spirits** and into **flames of fire**. It speaks in this way to identify what the angels are like and to show that God made them like that. If your readers would misunderstand this way of speaking, you could use a form that identifies what God made the angels like. Alternate translation: “The one who makes his angels so that they are like spirits, and his servants so that they are like flames of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
57HEB17d9yjfigs-possessionπυρὸς φλόγα1Here the author uses the possessive form to describe **flames** that are made of **fire**. If your language does not use the possessive form for that idea, you could express the idea with an adjective such as “fiery.” Alternate translation: “fiery flames” or “flames made of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
58HEB18nk2jgrammar-connect-logic-contrastδὲ1Here, **But on the other hand** introduces a contrast with what God said about the angels in [1:7](../01/07.md). The author contrasts the fact that God has created the angels with how the **Son** rules forever. If your readers would misunderstand **But on the other hand**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “However, on the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
59HEB18yp11figs-ellipsisπρὸς…τὸν Υἱόν1Here, the author does not include “he says” because he used these words in the last verse ([1:7](../01/07.md)). If your readers would misunderstand why the author omits these words, you could include them here. Alternate translation: “with regard to the Son, he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
60HEB18p1xxwriting-quotationsπρὸς…τὸν Υἱόν1But to the Son he saysHere and in the next verse, the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken about his Son. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 45:67](../../psa/45/06.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said about his Son, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “with regard to the Son, God speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
61HEB18jlqlπρὸς…τὸν Υἱόν1Here, **with regard to** could indicate that: (1) God is speaking about the **Son**. Alternate translation: “concerning the Son” (2) God is speaking directly to the **Son**. Alternate translation: “to the Son”
62HEB18b155guidelines-sonofgodprinciplesτὸν Υἱόν1Son**Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
63HEB18x9ucfigs-quotationsπρὸς…τὸν Υἱόν, ὁ θρόνος σου, ὁ Θεὸς, εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ αἰῶνος, καὶ ἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος ῥάβδος τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ.1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the next verse as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “to the Son {he says} that he is God and that his throne {is} forever {and} ever, and the scepter of righteousness {is} the scepter of his kingdom.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
64HEB18jqi7figs-yousingularσου1Here, **Your** refers to one person, the **Son**. Therefore, **Your** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
65HEB18ewm4figs-metonymyὁ θρόνος σου1Your throne, God, is forever and everHere, **throne** figuratively refers to what the person on the **throne** does, which is to rule. If your readers would misunderstand **throne**, you could express the idea by referring to “rule” or “reign.” Alternate translation: “Your reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
66HEB18qi4xfigs-exclamationsὁ Θεὸς1Here, **O God** directly addresses and names who “you” in the quote is. **O** is an older way to indicate direct address in English. Use a form in your language that indicates direct address. Alternate translation: “God” or “you who are God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
67HEB18eg09figs-idiomεἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ αἰῶνος1Here, **forever {and} ever** indicates that something lasts forever or does not come to an end. If your readers would misunderstand this idiom, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “lasts forever” or “never ends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
68HEB18k4cffigs-metonymyἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος ῥάβδος τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ1The scepter of your kingdom is the scepter of justiceHere, **scepter** figuratively refers to how the person who has the **scepter** rules. If your readers would misunderstand **scepter**, you could express the idea by referring to how the person “rules” or “reigns.” Alternate translation: “with righteousness {is} how he rules his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
69HEB18iprlfigs-abstractnounsἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous.” Alternate translation: “a righteous scepter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
70HEB18vl1nfigs-123personαὐτοῦ1Here the author refers to the **Son** in the third person instead of in the second person. He is still referring to the same person. If your readers would misunderstand **his** here, you could continue to use **you** instead. Alternate translation: “your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
71HEB18b7f0translate-textvariantsαὐτοῦ1Most later manuscripts have “your” here instead of **his**. However, the earliest manuscripts have **his**, and later scribes probably changed it to “your” to be consistent with the rest of the quote. Unless there is a good reason not to use **his**, you should follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
72HEB19pl80figs-quotationsἠγάπησας δικαιοσύνην καὶ ἐμίσησας ἀνομίαν; διὰ τοῦτο, ἔχρισέν σε ὁ Θεός, ὁ Θεός σου, ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως παρὰ τοὺς μετόχους σου1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentences as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Make sure that your translation fits with how you expressed the first half of the quote in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “He has loved righteousness and hated lawlessness. Therefore God, his God, has anointed him {with the} oil of exultation more than his companions.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
73HEB19p5vafigs-yousingularἠγάπησας…ἐμίσησας…σε…σου…σου1Here, **You**, **your**, and **you** refer to one person, the Son. Therefore, all forms of **you** in this verse are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
74HEB19olltfigs-abstractnounsδικαιοσύνην…ἀνομίαν1If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **righteousness** and **lawlessness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective or adverbs. Alternate translation: “what is righteous … what is lawless” or “what people do righteously … what people do lawlessly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
75HEB19lu3mfigs-doubletἔχρισέν…ὁ Θεός, ὁ Θεός σου1Here the quotation repeats **God** in order to emphasize that **God** is the one who “anoints” and also to identify him as **your God**, which means that he is the **God** whom **you** serve. If your readers would misunderstand why the quotation repeats **God**, you could express the idea by using **God** once and emphasize the phrase in another way. Alternate translation: “the God whom you serve has anointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
76HEB19eyqefigs-123personἔχρισέν…ὁ Θεός, ὁ Θεός σου1Since **God** is the one speaking this quotation, he refers to himself in the third person here. If your readers would misunderstand that God is speaking about himself, you could use the first person here to clarify that this is not another **God**. Alternate translation: “I, who am your God, have anointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
77HEB19t9ywfigs-metaphorἔχρισέν σε…ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως1has anointed you with the oil of joy more than your companionsIn the authors culture, people were often **anointed** with **oil** when they received special authority or power, including when a person became king. Here the author applies this “anointing” to the Son. In this situation, it figuratively refers to how God has exalted the Son and given him power and authority. The phrase **oil of exultation** refers to how the “anointing” leads to or results in **exultation**. If your readers would misunderstand the anointing language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “has honored and empowered you so that you exult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
78HEB19w1l1figs-possessionἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως1Here the quotation uses the possessive form to show that the **oil** leads to **exultation**. If your language does not use the possessive form for that idea, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that indicates result. Alternate translation: “{with the} oil that leads to exultation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
79HEB19h3nefigs-abstractnounsἀγαλλιάσεως1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **exultation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “exult” or “rejoice.” Alternate translation: “that makes you rejoice” or “which causes you to exult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
80HEB19akn8figs-extrainfoτοὺς μετόχους σου1Here the author does not clarify who the **companions** are. In the context of the quotation, they probably referred to other people in the royal family who did not become king. In the context of Hebrews, they probably refer to those who believe in Jesus. God saves them, but he does not seat them at his right hand like he does with Jesus. However, neither the quotation nor the author of Hebrews state explicitly who the **companions** are, so you should leave their identify unspecified if possible. Alternate translation: “those who are with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
81HEB110nsd4writing-quotationsκαί1Here and in the next two verses, the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He uses **And** to indicate that these are more words that God says “with regard to the Son” (see [1:8](../01/08.md)). The audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 102:2527](../../psa/102/25.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said about the Son, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “God says further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
82HEB110pbzofigs-quotationsκαί, σὺ κατ’ ἀρχάς, Κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας, καὶ ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν σού εἰσιν οἱ οὐρανοί1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the next two verses as indirect quotes as well. Alternate translation: “And further, according to {the} beginnings the Lord founded the earth, and the heavens are {the} works of his hands.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
83HEB110htmlfigs-parallelismσὺ κατ’ ἀρχάς, Κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας, καὶ ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν σού εἰσιν οἱ οὐρανοί1This part of the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses **earth** language, and the other uses **heavens** language. This was considered good poetry in the authors culture, and **heavens** and **earth** together refer to everything that God made. If your readers would misunderstand the parallelism, and if this would not be good poetry in your culture, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “according to {the} beginnings, O Lord, you founded the earth and the heavens” or “according to {the} beginnings, O Lord, you made everything, both earth and heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
84HEB110yp0wfigs-yousingularσὺ…ἐθεμελίωσας…σού1Here, **you** and **your** refer to one person, the Son. Therefore, **you** and **your** are singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
85HEB110tmu5figs-idiomκατ’ ἀρχάς1In the beginningHere, **according to {the} beginnings** refers to when all created things first came into being. In other words, the **beginnings** identifies the time when God created the universe. If your readers would misunderstand **according to {the} beginnings**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to when everything first began to exist. Alternate translation: “when everything began to exist” or “at the beginning of the creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
86HEB110klk9figs-exclamationsΚύριε1Here, **O Lord** directly addresses and names who **you** in the quote is. **O** is an older way to indicate direct address in English. Use a form in your language that indicates direct address. Alternate translation: “Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
87HEB110j64kfigs-metaphorτὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας1you laid the earths foundationHere the quotation refers to **the earth** as if it were a building that was set on a “foundation.” The **Lord** is the one who put **the earth** on its foundation, or **founded** it. The author of the quotations speaks in this way in order to show that the **Lord** is the one who created and sustains **the earth**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “perfectly set up the earth” or “made the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
88HEB110k199figs-abstractnounsἔργα τῶν χειρῶν σού1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “make” or “do.” Alternate translation: “what your hands made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
89HEB110r19vfigs-metonymyτῶν χειρῶν σού1The heavens are the work of your handsHere, **hands** figuratively refer to the power and action that a person has to do **works**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “of your power” or “that you powerfully did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
90HEB111zugpfigs-quotationsαὐτοὶ ἀπολοῦνται, σὺ δὲ διαμένεις; καὶ πάντες ὡς ἱμάτιον παλαιωθήσονται,1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the previous and following verses as indirect quotes as well. Alternate translation: “They themselves will perish, but he himself will continue; and they will all wear out like a garment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
91HEB111a6lewriting-pronounsαὐτοὶ ἀπολοῦνται…πάντες…παλαιωθήσονται1They will perishHere, **They** and **they** refer to the “earth” and the “heavens” in [1:10](../01/10.md), which together refer to everything that God has made. If your readers would misunderstand **They** and **they**, you could clarify what they refer back to. Alternate translation: “Earth and heavens themselves will perish … they will all wear out” or “Every created thing itself will perish … every one of them will wear out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
92HEB111fqk2figs-rpronounsαὐτοὶ ἀπολοῦνται, σὺ δὲ διαμένεις1Here, the words translated **themselves** and **yourself** emphasize the contrast between “them” and “you.” Consider using a natural way to emphasize this contrast in your language. Alternate translation: “It is they who will perish, but it is you who will continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
93HEB111g0dtfigs-yousingularσὺ…διαμένεις1Here, **you yourself** refers to one person, the Son. Therefore, **you yourself** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
94HEB111yl85translate-unknownσὺ…διαμένεις1Here, **continue** is the exact opposite of **perish**. What **continue** means it that **you**, the Son, will never cease to exist or fall apart. If your readers would misunderstand **continue**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the Son as one who never stops existing and functioning. Alternate translation: “you yourself will never perish” or “you yourself always exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
95HEB111qy4efigs-simileπάντες ὡς ἱμάτιον παλαιωθήσονται1wear out like a piece of clothingHere the author of the quotation compares the heavens and earth to a piece of clothing that gets old and eventually becomes useless. By speaking in this way, he illustrates how everything that God has created will eventually fall apart. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable simile or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “they will all fall apart like a worn pair of shoes” or “they will eventually come to nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
96HEB112kl5efigs-quotationsκαὶ ὡσεὶ περιβόλαιον ἑλίξεις αὐτούς, ὡς ἱμάτιον καὶ ἀλλαγήσονται; σὺ δὲ ὁ αὐτὸς εἶ, καὶ τὰ ἔτη σου οὐκ ἐκλείψουσιν.1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the previous two verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “And as a cloak he will roll them up, and as a garment they will be changed. But he himself is the same, and his years will not fail.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
97HEB112iar0figs-yousingularἑλίξεις…σὺ …εἶ…σου1Here, **you**, **yourself**, and **your** refer to one person, the Son. Therefore, all forms of **you** in this verse are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
98HEB112ienxwriting-pronounsαὐτούς…ἀλλαγήσονται1Just as in the previous verse, **them** and **they** here refer to the “earth” and the “heavens,” which identify everything that God has created. If your readers would misunderstand what **them** and **they** refer to, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the earth and heavens … they will be changed” or “all created things … they will be changed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
99HEB112c2n6figs-parallelismκαὶ ὡσεὶ περιβόλαιον ἑλίξεις αὐτούς, ὡς ἱμάτιον καὶ ἀλλαγήσονται1Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses **cloak** and “rolling” language, and the other uses **garment** and “changing” language. This was considered good poetry in the authors culture. If your readers would misunderstand the parallelism, and if this would not be good poetry in your culture, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “And as a cloak you will change them” or “And as a garment they will be rolled up and changed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
100HEB112n4hlfigs-simileὡσεὶ περιβόλαιον ἑλίξεις αὐτούς, ὡς ἱμάτιον καὶ ἀλλαγήσονται1roll them up like a cloakHere the author continues to compare the heavens and earth to clothing, in this case a **cloak** or a **garment**. Both of these words refer to outer clothing. Both similes describe what a person would do with a dirty or old piece of clothing. They would “change” out of it, and they would **roll** it up to wash it or throw it away. The author of the quotation uses this simile to show that God will remove and replace what he has created as easily as a person changes out of an outer garment. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable simile or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “as a worn shoe you will throw them in a corner, and as an old shoe they will be taken off” or “you will remove them, and they will be transformed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
101HEB112iv4rfigs-activepassiveὡς ἱμάτιον καὶ ἀλλαγήσονται1they will be changed like a piece of clothingIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **they** who are **changed** rather than the person doing the “changing.” If you must state who does the action, the author implies that “the Lord” does it. Alternate translation: “and as a garment you will change them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
102HEB112ncsifigs-parallelismσὺ…ὁ αὐτὸς εἶ, καὶ τὰ ἔτη σου οὐκ ἐκλείψουσιν1Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement refers to how the Lord stays **the same**, and the other refers to how his **years will not fail**. This was considered good poetry in the authors culture. If your readers would misunderstand the parallelism, and if this would not be good poetry in your culture, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “you stay alive forever” or “you yourself are always the same” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
103HEB112vg0tfigs-rpronounsσὺ…εἶ1Here, the word translated **yourself** emphasizes the contrast between “they” and “you.” Consider using a natural way to emphasize this contrast in your language. Alternate translation: “it is you who are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
104HEB112i761translate-unknownσὺ…ὁ αὐτὸς εἶ1they will be changedHere, to be **the same** is the exact opposite of being **changed**. If your readers would misunderstand **are the same**, you could use a word or phrase that describes someone who never changes. Alternate translation: “you yourself never change” or “you yourself stay what you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
105HEB112v5mffigs-idiomἔτη σου οὐκ ἐκλείψουσιν1your years do not endHere, **your years will not fail** means that a person is alive during every “year.” They will never run out of **years**, which means that they are always alive. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a phrase that indicates that a person never dies or always lives. Alternate translation: “your life will never end” or “you will never run out of years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
106HEB113pqs9writing-quotationsπρὸς τίνα δὲ τῶν ἀγγέλων εἴρηκέν ποτε1General Information:Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken to his Son, not to angels. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:1](../../psa/110/01.md). Since the author introduces the quotation as words that God has said to his Son, not to angels, you should introduce the quotations as words that someone has or has not said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “But to which of the angels has he ever spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
107HEB113z0hnfigs-quotationsεἴρηκέν ποτε, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου, ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the question as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “has he ever said that he should sit as his right hand until he makes his enemies a footstool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
108HEB113kz68figs-rquestionπρὸς τίνα δὲ τῶν ἀγγέλων εἴρηκέν ποτε, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου, ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου?1But to which of the angels has God said at any time … feet”?The author does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “none of them,” for God said these words to his own Son. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. See how translated the similar question in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “But God has never said to any of the angels, Sit at my right hand until I make your enemies a footstool for your feet.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
109HEB113z0mewriting-pronounsεἴρηκέν ποτε1Here, **he** refers to God the Father. If your readers would misunderstand **he**, you could make the reference explicit. Alternate translation: “has God ever said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
110HEB113k8j9figs-yousingularκάθου…σου…σου1Here, **Sit** and **you** refer to one person, the Son. Therefore, all forms of **you** in this verse are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
111HEB113s6k7translate-symactionκάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου1Sit at my right handWhen someone sits at the **right hand** of God, it symbolizes that persons honor, authority, and ability to rule. If your readers would misunderstand what **Sit at my right hand** means, you could express the idea explicitly. See how you translated the similar words in [1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “Sit to rule at my right hand” or “Take the place of honor and authority at my right hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
112HEB113ee35figs-synecdocheἐκ δεξιῶν μου1Here,**at my right hand** refers to the place next to a persons **right hand**, which would be the “right side.” In the authors culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If your readers would misunderstand **at my right hand**, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that the Son has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at my right side” or “at the honorable place next to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
113HEB113ulp5figs-metaphorἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου, ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου1until I make your enemies a stool for your feetHere the author of the quotation speaks as if the Sons **enemies** could become a **footstool** on which he puts his **feet**. In the authors culture, something that is under **feet** has been conquered and is powerless and shamed, so the point is that God will conquer and shame all the **enemies** of the Son. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “until I make your enemies kneel before you” or “until I conquer and shame your enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
114HEB114fk5vfigs-rquestionοὐχὶ πάντες εἰσὶν λειτουργικὰ πνεύματα, εἰς διακονίαν ἀποστελλόμενα, διὰ τοὺς μέλλοντας κληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν?1Are not all angels spirits … inherit salvation?The author does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, they are.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “What is true is that they are all ministering spirits, being sent for service for the sake of those who are going to inherit salvation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
115HEB114dbg8writing-pronounsεἰσὶν1Here, **they** refers to the “angels” in [1:13](../01/13.md). If your readers would misunderstand **they**, you could refer to the “angels” explicitly. Alternate translation: “Are the angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
116HEB114ds6zfigs-activepassiveἀποστελλόμενα1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the angels, who are **sent**, rather than the person doing the “sending.” If you must state who does the action, the author implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “those whom God sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
117HEB114ivy4figs-abstractnounsεἰς διακονίαν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **service**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “serve.” Alternate translation: “to serve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
118HEB114v541figs-metaphorκληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν1for those who will inherit salvationHere the author speaks as if believers were children who would receive property that a parent passes on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers receive **salvation** from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “to receive salvation from God” or “to be given salvation by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
119HEB114fgs4τοὺς μέλλοντας1Alternate translation: “those who are about” or “those who are destined”
120HEB114id6kfigs-abstractnounsκληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” In this case, you may need to find another way to express the idea behind **inherit**. Alternate translation: “to be saved as a gift from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
121HEB2intros2gd0# Hebrews 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n2. The Son and the angels (1:52:18)\n * Exhortation: Listen to the message! (2:14)\n * Teaching: The Son becomes lower than the angels to help his brothers (2:518)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [2:68](../02/06.md), [1213](../02/12.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Angels\n\nIn this chapter, the author continues to speak about angels. In [2:2](../02/02.md), he refers to a tradition that says that God gave the law to Moses through angels. Then, in [2:59](../02/05.md), he shows that Jesus, not angels, is the one who rules the “world that is coming.” In fact, Jesus came for the sake of humans, not angels ([2:16](../02/16.md)). Again, the author is not attacking angels. Instead, he uses angels, whom everyone knows are powerful and important, to show how much more important Jesus and the salvation he offers are. Translate “angels” the way you did in the previous chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/angel]])\n\n### Jesus as high priest\n\nIn [2:17](../02/17.md), the author first refers to Jesus as a “priest,” here specifically a “high priest.” This is an important theme in Hebrews. In much of the rest of the letter, the author argues that Jesus is a high priest who offers a sacrifice in the heavenly sanctuary. The author simply introduces the title “high priest” here, but he will develop the idea later. So, do not include any extra information here, but carefully consider how to translate “high priest” so that it fits with what the author later says about Jesus as a high priest. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Kinship language\n\nThroughout this chapter, the author uses kinship language to describe those who believe in Jesus. They are Gods “sons” or “children” ([2:10](../02/10.md), [1314](../02/13.md)), Jesus “brothers” ([2:1112](../02/11.md), [17](../02/17.md)), and each is a “descendant of Abraham” ([2:16](../02/16.md)). As Gods children, they are Jesus brothers and part of the family of Abraham, who is Jesus ancestor. The idea that believers are part of Gods family is important in Hebrews and the Bible in general, so if possible preserve this language in your translation. Consider using words that refer to adopted family members. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/son]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/children]], and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Who is the “man” in the quotation from Psalm 8?\n\nIn [2:68](../06/06.md), the author quotes from [Psalm 8:46](../../psa/08/04.md). The Psalm refers to “man” and “son of man.” In the context of the Psalm itself, these words use the masculine singular form to refer to humans in general. However, Jesus used the phrase “Son of Man” to refer to himself during his earthly ministry. Some scholars argue that the author of Hebrews quotes “son of man” from Psalm 8 because he is using it to refer to Jesus directly. Others argue that the author uses “son of man” and “man” in the Psalm quotation to refer to humans in general but then applies what the Psalm says is true about humans to Jesus, who is the only human who is now “crowned with honor and glory” ([2:9](../02/09.md)). Since the author never refers to Jesus as “Son of Man,” this second option is probably correct. Consider how you can translate “man” and “son of man” in the Psalm quotation so that they can apply first to humans in general and then to Jesus in particular.
122HEB21x7pxgrammar-connect-logic-resultδιὰ τοῦτο1Connecting Statement:Here the author introduces a result or implication from what he said about the Son and the angels in [1:114](../01/01.md). Because God now speaks through his Son, who is greater than the angels, the audience needs to **give attention**. If your readers would misunderstand that **Because of this** draws an inference from the previous chapter, you could use a word or phrase that do does draw this inference. Alternate translation: “Because God is speaking through his Son” or “Because of all that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
123HEB21ooqpδεῖ περισσοτέρως προσέχειν ἡμᾶς1Alternate translation: “it is most important for us to give attention” or “we must above all give attention”
124HEB21ol8mfigs-infostructureδεῖ περισσοτέρως προσέχειν ἡμᾶς1Here, **far more** could modify (1) **necessary**. See the ULT. (2) **give attention**. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for us to give far more attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
125HEB21a2afδεῖ περισσοτέρως προσέχειν ἡμᾶς1Here the author does not specify what he is comparing **far more** with. He could be: (1) using the comparative **far more** to emphasize how important it is to **give attention**. In this case, he is not making a comparison at all. Alternate translation: “it is most necessary for us to give attention” (2) comparing how they should **give attention** with how those who receive messages from angels **give attention**. Alternate translation: “it is far more necessary for us than for those who hear angels to give attention” (3) comparing how they should **give attention** with how they are currently giving **attention**. Alternate translation: “it necessary for us to give far more attention that we have been”
126HEB21wzt9figs-abstractnounsπροσέχειν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **attention**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “attend” or “focus.” Alternate translation: “to attend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
127HEB21e724figs-activepassiveτοῖς ἀκουσθεῖσιν1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **heard** rather than focusing on the person doing the “hearing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “we” did it. Alternate translation: “to the {things} that we heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
128HEB21ayd1figs-metaphorμήποτε παραρυῶμεν1so that we do not drift away from itHere the author speaks as if the audience were boats that could **drift away** from where they were moored. In this metaphor, the place where the boats are moored is the good news about Jesus, and “drifting away” from this place refers to slowly failing to believe this good news. The author uses this metaphor to encourage the audience to remain “moored” to the good news by continuing to focus on it and firmly believe it. If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “so that we might not slide {from them}” or “so that we might not slowly fail to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
129HEB22omsrgrammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Here, **For** introduces the reason why “it is far more necessary for us to give attention” to the message ([2:1](../02/01.md)). This reason continues into the next verse ([2:3](../02/03.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “You can tell that we need to give attention because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
130HEB22k5kbgrammar-connect-condition-factεἰ γὰρ ὁ…λόγος1For if the messageHere the author is speaking as if these things were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that they are actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the author is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “For since the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
131HEB22gea1figs-explicitὁ δι’ ἀγγέλων λαληθεὶς λόγος1In the authors culture, people believed that God gave his law to Moses through angels. Here, **the message spoken through angels** refers to this law that Moses received from God with angels as the messengers. If your readers would not know that this **message** is Moses law, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the message spoken through angels to Moses” or “Moses law, which was spoken through angels,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
132HEB22j4fafigs-activepassiveὁ δι’ ἀγγέλων λαληθεὶς λόγος1For if the message that was spoken through the angelsIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what was **spoken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “speaking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it by means of angels. Alternate translation: “the message that God spoke through angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
133HEB22u52ifigs-abstractnounsπᾶσα παράβασις καὶ παρακοὴ1every trespass and disobedience receives just punishmentIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **transgression** and **disobedience**, you could express the ideas by using a verbs such as “transgress” and “disobey.” Alternate translation: “any person who transgressed and disobeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
134HEB22y2y7figs-doubletπαράβασις καὶ παρακοὴ1trespass and disobedienceHere, **transgression** and **disobedience** mean almost the same thing. The word **transgression** refers to when someone breaks a law or command that they know about. The word **disobedience** refers to when someone hears a law or command and ignores it. The author uses both words to emphasize that any kind of law-breaking was punished. If you do not have words that represent these two ideas, and if your readers would not understand that the author uses the two words to refer to any type of law-breaking, you could express the idea with a single word or phrase. Alternate translation: “misdeed” or “case of law-breaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
135HEB22qyo8figs-abstractnounsἔλαβεν ἔνδικον μισθαποδοσίαν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **penalty**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “punish” or “penalize.” Alternate translation: “was justly penalized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
136HEB23fv4qfigs-rquestionπῶς ἡμεῖς ἐκφευξόμεθα τηλικαύτης ἀμελήσαντες σωτηρίας?1how then can we escape if we ignore so great a salvation?The author does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “we will not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “we will definitely not escape, having neglected so great a salvation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
137HEB23mrsyfigs-explicitἡμεῖς ἐκφευξόμεθα1Here the author implies that **we** will not **escape** what those under the law experienced when they broke that law: a “just penalty” ([2:2](../02/02.md)). So, he does not include what **we escape** because he stated it in the last verse. If your readers would misunderstand what **we escape** from, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “will we escape the penalty” or “will we escape just punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
138HEB23vondgrammar-connect-condition-hypotheticalἡμεῖς ἐκφευξόμεθα τηλικαύτης ἀμελήσαντες σωτηρίας1Here, **having neglected** introduces a hypothetical possibility. The author is not claiming that he or his audience have **neglected** or will “neglect” the **salvation**. Instead, he is asking the question about what we would happen if he or his audience did “neglect” the **salvation**. If your readers would misunderstand that **having neglected** introduces a possibility, you could use a form that does introduce a possibility. Alternate translation: “will we escape if we neglect so great a salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
139HEB23i2zvtranslate-unknownἀμελήσαντες1ignoreHere, **neglected** refers to ignoring or failing to pay attention to something. If your readers would misunderstand **neglected**, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “pay no attention to” or “consider unimportant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
140HEB23gm6vfigs-abstractnounsτηλικαύτης…σωτηρίας? ἥτις1This is salvation that was first announced by the Lord and confirmed to us by those who heard itIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “the amazing way in which God saves us? This {way in which God saves us}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
141HEB23dmshfigs-metonymyτηλικαύτης…σωτηρίας? ἥτις1Here, **salvation** figuratively refers to the “message” about **salvation**. The author makes this clear in the second half of the verse, when he refers to how the **salvation** is **spoken**. If your readers would misunderstand **salvation**, you could express the idea by referring to a “message” or “proclamation” about **salvation**. Alternate translation: “the proclamation about so great a salvation? Which {proclamation about salvation}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
142HEB23dyn1figs-activepassiveἀρχὴν λαβοῦσα, λαλεῖσθαι διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what was **chosen** and **spoken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “choosing” and “speaking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did the “choosing” and **the Lord** did the “speaking.” Alternate translation: “God having chosen the Lord to speak it first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
143HEB23le2lfigs-idiomἀρχὴν λαβοῦσα, λαλεῖσθαι1Here, **first having been chosen** identifies that something was the **first** or began some process. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use a word or phrase that identifies that something begins a process or was the **first**. Alternate translation: “first spoken” or “which had its beginning when it was spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
144HEB23fpvxfigs-activepassiveὑπὸ τῶν ἀκουσάντων εἰς ἡμᾶς ἐβεβαιώθη1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what was **confirmed** rather than focusing on the people doing the “confirming.” Alternate translation: “those who heard confirmed to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
145HEB24k4j9figs-abstractnounsσημείοις…καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ ποικίλαις δυνάμεσιν, καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου μερισμοῖς1If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **signs**, **wonders**, **miracles**, and **distributions**, you could express the ideas by using verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “by enabling people to do amazing and wonderful things, to act powerfully in various ways, and to be empowered by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
146HEB24li2nfigs-doubletσημείοις…καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ ποικίλαις δυνάμεσιν1Here the author uses three similar words to describe supernatural acts that God empowers his people to do. The word **signs** emphasizes that these acts reveal something, **wonders** emphasizes that these acts are amazing or unusual, and **miracles** emphasizes that these acts are powerful. The author uses these three words to show that God uses lots of things to “testify” to the truth of the message about salvation. If your language does not have different words that emphasize these three aspects of the supernatural acts, you could combine two or all three of these words into one word or phrase and emphasize the variety of testimony in another way. Alternate translation: “by many and various miracles” or “by many signs and various miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
147HEB24ix3otranslate-unknownΠνεύματος Ἁγίου μερισμοῖς1Here, **distributions** refers to specific ways in which the **Holy Spirit** empowers people. Sometimes these specific ways are referred to as “gifts.” If your readers would misunderstand **distributions**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how people receive specific “gifts” or “empowerings” from the **Holy Spirit**. Alternate translation: “gifts from the Holy Spirit” or “specific empowerings of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
148HEB24m2p8figs-abstractnounsκατὰ τὴν αὐτοῦ θέλησιν1according to his willIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **will**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “want” or “chose.” Alternate translation: “in just the way he wanted to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
149HEB24jsavwriting-pronounsαὐτοῦ1Here, **his** could refer to: (1) **God**. Alternate translation: “Gods” (2) **the Holy Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Spirits” or “his own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
150HEB25i3bhgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1For it was not to the angels that God subjectedHere, **For** primarily introduces a new topic into the discussion. However, it may also indicate that what the author says about this new topic supports or gives a basis for an earlier claim. If this is so, **For** could introduce support for the claim in [2:1](../02/01.md) about the need to “give attention,” or it could introduce support for the arguments in [1:514](../01/05.md) about how the Son is superior to the angels. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
151HEB25rqr9translate-unknownτὴν οἰκουμένην τὴν μέλλουσαν1the world to comeHere, **world** is the same word that is translated “world” in [1:6](../01/06.md), and the author probably has the same **world** in mind here. He specifies that it is **coming**, which means that humans on earth do not yet experience this **world** but will experience it some day, when Jesus comes back. If your readers would misunderstand **the world that is coming**, express the idea in the same way you did in [1:6](../01/06.md) and include the idea that humans will someday experience this **world**. Alternate translation: “the new world that God will give us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
152HEB25bztrfigs-exclusiveλαλοῦμεν1Here, **we** refers to the author, who is one who “speaks.” However, the author assumed that the audience was involved in the conversation by “hearing” what he “spoke,” so he uses **we**. If your readers would misunderstand that **we** refers to both sides of a conversation, you could refer to just the speaker by using a pronoun such as “I.” Alternate translation: “I am speaking” or “I am telling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
153HEB26jh56writing-quotationsδιεμαρτύρατο…πού τις λέγων1General Information:Here and in the next two verses, the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He intentionally uses vague words to introduce the quotation, and he does not identify who wrote the words or where they could be found. The quotation comes from [Psalm 8:46](../../psa/08/04.md). Since the author intentionally avoids giving information about where the quotation comes from, you should not include such information in your translation. If your readers would not know where the quote comes from, you could include the reference in a footnote. Alternate translation: “you can read these words in the Scriptures:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
154HEB26m30vfigs-quotationsλέγων, τί ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος, ὅτι μιμνῄσκῃ αὐτοῦ, ἢ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου, ὅτι ἐπισκέπτῃ αὐτόν?1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the next two verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “asking about what man is that you remember, or a son of man, that you watch over him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
155HEB26df5afigs-rquestionτί ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος, ὅτι μιμνῄσκῃ αὐτοῦ, ἢ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου, ὅτι ἐπισκέπτῃ αὐτόν?1What is man, that you are mindful of him?The author does not include this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he includes it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing,” for nothing about **man** or a **son of man** is significant enough for God to **remember** or **watch over** him. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “Man has nothing that should make you remember him, and a son of man has nothing that should make you watch over him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
156HEB26mz3yfigs-parallelismτί ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος, ὅτι μιμνῄσκῃ αὐτοῦ, ἢ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου, ὅτι ἐπισκέπτῃ αὐτόν1Here, the quotation includes two questions that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the authors culture. If your readers would misunderstand the parallelism, and if this would not be good poetry in your culture, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “What is man, that you care about him” or “What is a son of man that you remember him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
157HEB26vj7hfigs-gendernotationsἄνθρωπος…αὐτοῦ…υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου…αὐτόν1The quotation refers to **man** and **son of man**, which are both singular and masculine. The author could intend these words primarily to identify: (1) humans in general. While he goes on to identify Jesus as the only human who currently fulfills these words (see [2:9](../02/09.md)), he intends the words first of all to refer to humans in general. Alternate translation: “a human … him or her … a child of a human … him or her” (2) Jesus, who calls himself a **son of man**. In this case, you should preserve the singular and masculine language. Alternate translation: “Man … him … the Son of Man … him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
158HEB26j50ufigs-yousingularμιμνῄσκῃ…ἐπισκέπτῃ1Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, **you** in this verse is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
159HEB26wkd9figs-idiomυἱὸς ἀνθρώπου1Or a son of man, that you care for him?In the culture of the quotations author, **son of man** was a way to refer to a person who was descended from other humans. In other words, it is another way to say **man** or “human.” Jesus used this phrase to refer to himself during his earthly life, so it is possible that the author of Hebrews intended **son of man** to refer to Jesus directly. However, the author never uses **son of man** to refer to Jesus anywhere else. If your readers would misunderstand **son of man**, you could: (1) use a word or phrase that refers to humans in general. Alternate translation: “a human being” (2) use the same phrase that Jesus used to refer to himself. Alternate translation: “the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
160HEB26e47vfigs-ellipsisυἱὸς ἀνθρώπου1Or a son of manHere, the author does not include “what is” because he used these words in the first part of the sentence. If your readers would misunderstand why the author omits these words, you could include them here. Alternate translation: “what is a son of man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
161HEB27pig3figs-quotationsἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν, βραχύ τι παρ’ ἀγγέλους; δόξῃ καὶ τιμῇ ἐστεφάνωσας αὐτόν1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these clauses as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Make sure that your translation fits with how you expressed the first part of the quote in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “You have made him a little lower than {the} angels; you have crowned him with glory and honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
162HEB27yb4ffigs-yousingularἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν, βραχύ τι …ἐστεφάνωσας1Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, **you** in this verse is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
163HEB27q9rbfigs-gendernotationsαὐτὸν…αὐτόν1Just as in [2:6](../02/06.md), **him** could primarily refer to: (1) humans in general. Alternate translation: “him or her … him or her” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “Him … Him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
164HEB27ka5afigs-metaphorἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν, βραχύ τι παρ’ ἀγγέλους1a little lower than the angelsHere the quotation refers to how humans are **lower than {the} angels**. While he may have believed that this was true in terms of spatial placement, since **angels** live in heaven “above” and humans live on earth “below,” the point is primarily about status and power. Being **lower** means that humans have less status and power than angels. If your readers would misunderstand **lower than {the} angels**, you could use a comparable idiom or a phrase that describes how humans have less status and power than **angels**. Alternate translation: “You have given him a little less status than {the} angels” or “You have made him a little less important than {the} angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
165HEB27s6ddfigs-idiomβραχύ τι1Here, **a little** could refer primarily to place or to time. The author eventually applies the phrase to how Jesus was lower than the angels for **a little** time (see [2:9](../02/09.md)). However, the quotation itself suggests that humans have a place that is **a little** lower. If that is true, then the author later uses **a little** to refer to time in a play on words. You could express **a little** so that it refers to: (1) place. Alternate translation: “a little bit” (2) time. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
166HEB27s85xfigs-metaphorδόξῃ καὶ τιμῇ ἐστεφάνωσας αὐτόν1you crowned him with glory and honorHere the quotation refers to the **glory** and **honor** that God gave to humans as if they were together a crown placed on the head of a king to signify his power and authority. If your readers would misunderstand **crowned**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “you gave him great glory and honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
167HEB27tjn6figs-abstractnounsδόξῃ καὶ τιμῇ1made man … crowned himIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **glory** and **honor**, you could express the ideas by using adjectives such as “glorious” and “honorable,” or you could use verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “so that he is glorious and honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
168HEB27z8ubfigs-doubletδόξῃ καὶ τιμῇ1Here, **glory** and **honor** mean almost the same thing. The quotation uses both words to emphasize how much **glory and honor** God gave to humans. If your readers would misunderstand why the quotation uses two very similar words, or if you do not have two words that express this particular meaning, you could use one word or phrase here. Alternate translation: “with glory” or “with glorious honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
169HEB27nee4translate-textvariantsτιμῇ1After **honor**, many ancient manuscripts add the clause “and you have put him over the works of your hands.” This clause is in the Psalm that the author quotes from (see [Psalm 8:6](../../psa/08/06.md)). However, most likely the author did not include this clause because it was not important to the point he is making. Later, scribes probably added the clause because they knew that it was in the Psalm. If possible, do not include the clause here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
170HEB28o9o7figs-quotationsπάντα ὑπέταξας ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ.1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the clause as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the previous two verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “You have subjected all {things} under his feet.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
171HEB28yn89figs-yousingularὑπέταξας1Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, here **you** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
172HEB28k5j2figs-metaphorπάντα ὑπέταξας ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ1You put everything in subjection under his feetHere the author of the quotation speaks as if **all {things}** could be under the **feet** of humans. In the authors culture, something that is under feet has been conquered and is controlled by the person whose feet it is under. The point is that **all {things}** are conquered and controlled by humans. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “You made him control all {things}” or “You gave him authority over {all things}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
173HEB28ac9ffigs-gendernotationsαὐτοῦ…αὐτῷ…αὐτῷ1his feet … to himJust as in [2:67](../02/06.md), **his** and **him** could primarily refer to: (1) humans in general. Alternate translation: “his or her … to him or her … to him or her” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “His … to Him … to Him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
174HEB28sq9iwriting-quotationsἐν τῷ γὰρ ὑποτάξαι τὰ πάντα1Here, **For in** introduces a restatement of part of the quote. The author restates this portion of the quote (**subjecting all the things**) so that he can comment on it. If your readers would misunderstand that **For in** introduces a restatement of part of the quote, you could use a form that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “By using the phrase subjecting all the things” or “For with the words subjecting all the things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
175HEB28nwciwriting-pronounsἀφῆκεν1Here, **he** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **he* refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “God left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
176HEB28rf44figs-doublenegativesοὐδὲν ἀφῆκεν αὐτῷ ἀνυπότακτον1He did not leave anything not subjected to himThis double negative **nothing not** means that there are no exceptions to how all things will be **subjected** to **him**. If your readers would misunderstand the double negative, you could use a form that only includes one negative. Alternate translation: “he did not omit anything that could be subjected to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
177HEB28xy7cfigs-activepassiveοὐδὲν…ἀνυπότακτον…τὰ πάντα ὑποτεταγμένα1we do not yet see everything subjected to himIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **subjected** rather than focusing on the person doing the “subjecting.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “nothing that God did not subject … God subjecting all the {things}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
178HEB29wlt0figs-metaphorτὸν…βραχύ τι παρ’ ἀγγέλους ἠλαττωμένον1Here the author refers to how Jesus was **lower than the angels**. While he may have believed that this was true in terms of spatial placement, since angels live in heaven “above” and Jesus lived on earth “below,” the point is primarily about status and power. Being **lower** means that **Jesus** had less status and power than the **angels**. If your readers would misunderstand **lower than the angels**, you could use a comparable idiom or a phrase that describes how **Jesus** had less status and power than **angels** during his incarnate life. See how you translated this clause in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “who had a little less status than the angels” or “who was a little less important than the angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
179HEB29ma4jfigs-activepassiveβραχύ τι…ἠλαττωμένον1who was madeIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Jesus**, who **was made**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “making.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God made a little lower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
180HEB29ck8ifigs-idiomβραχύ τι1Here, **a little** could refer primarily to place or to time. Here, it is likely that the author uses the phrase to show that Jesus was lower than the angels for **a little** time. However, the phrase in the quotation in [2:7](../02/07.md) suggested that humans have a place that is **a little** lower. If that is true, then the author here uses **a little** to refer to time in a play on words. He uses the same phrase that referred to place in the quotation, but he uses it to refer to time. You could express **a little** so that it refers to: (1) time. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (2) place. Alternate translation: “a little bit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
181HEB29i4fcfigs-metaphorδόξῃ καὶ τιμῇ ἐστεφανωμένον1lower than the angels … crowned with glory and honorHere the quotation refers to the **glory** and **honor** that God gave to **Jesus** as if they were together a crown placed on the head of a king to signify his power and authority. If your readers would misunderstand **crowned**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. See how you translated this phrase in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “given great glory and honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
182HEB29uri1figs-activepassiveἐστεφανωμένον1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Jesus**, who is **crowned**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “crowning.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God crowned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
183HEB29oe0nfigs-abstractnounsδόξῃ καὶ τιμῇ1If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **glory** and **honor**, you could express the ideas by using adjectives such as “glorious” and “honorable,” or you could use verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “so that he is glorious and honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
184HEB29r53efigs-possessionδιὰ τὸ πάθημα τοῦ θανάτου1Here the author uses the possessive form to refer to **suffering** that is the experience of **death**. If your readers would misunderstand that Jesus “suffers,” or experiences, **death**, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “because he suffered death” or “because he experienced death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
185HEB29ovkxfigs-abstractnounsτὸ πάθημα τοῦ θανάτου1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “the fact that he died” or “{his} suffering that led to him dying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
186HEB29bgrcfigs-abstractnounsχάριτι Θεοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grace**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “kind” or “gracious.” Alternate translation: “by Gods kind action” or “by how God acts kindly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
187HEB29bil4figs-metaphorγεύσηται θανάτου1he might taste deathHere the author speaks as if **death** were food that people could **taste**. He speaks in this way to show that Jesus experienced death as much as a person who eats food truly experiences that food. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “he might experience death” or “he participate in death (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
188HEB29yyoafigs-abstractnounsγεύσηται θανάτου1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “he might taste what dying is like” or “he might die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
189HEB210bwa6grammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Here, **For** introduces an explanation of how and why Jesus “tastes of death on behalf of everyone.” If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Here is why that happened:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
190HEB210wsnitranslate-unknownἔπρεπεν1Here, **it was proper** identifies that something is appropriate or correct for a specific situation. If your readers would misunderstand **it was proper**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to correct or appropriate behavior. Alternate translation: “it was fitting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
191HEB210fjmwwriting-pronounsαὐτῷ1Here, **him** refers to God the Father, who is the one who “perfects” the **founding leader**, who is Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **him** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “for God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
192HEB210dp82figs-infostructureπολλοὺς υἱοὺς εἰς δόξαν ἀγαγόντα, τὸν ἀρχηγὸν τῆς σωτηρίας αὐτῶν, διὰ παθημάτων τελειῶσαι.1Here, **having brought many sons into glory** could refer to: (1) what the **founding leader**, Jesus, does. Alternate translation: “to perfect through sufferings the one who has brought many sons into glory, who is the founding leader of their salvation” (2) what God the Father does. Alternate translation: “who has brought many sons into glory, to perfect the founding leader of their salvation through sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
193HEB210ou87πολλοὺς υἱοὺς εἰς δόξαν ἀγαγόντα1Here, **having brought** emphasizes the beginning of the process more than its completion. The point is that the “bringing” of “many sons into glory” has begun. If your readers would misunderstand what **having brought** emphasizes, you could make it clearer that it emphasizes the beginning of the “bringing.” Alternate translation: “having started bringing many sons into glory”
194HEB210r899figs-metaphorπολλοὺς υἱοὺς εἰς δόξαν ἀγαγόντα1bring many sons to gloryHere the author speaks of **glory** as if it were a place into which the **sons** could be **brought**. The author speaks in this way to identify **glory** as a goal toward which those who believe are aiming. If your readers would misunderstand that **glory** is the goal toward which believers are being taken, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “having given glory to many sons” or “having oriented many sons toward glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
195HEB210l95yfigs-gendernotationsπολλοὺς υἱοὺς1many sonsHere, **many sons** refers to all those who believe in Jesus, who are **many**. The phrase includes both males and females, and it does not exclude anyone who believes. If your readers would misunderstand **many sons**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies everyone who believes, both males and females. Alternate translation: “the many sons and daughters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
196HEB210scidtranslate-kinshipπολλοὺς υἱοὺς1Here, **sons** refers to everyone who believes. Just as Jesus is a **son** of God the Father (see [1:2](../01/02.md)), those who believe in him are also **sons** of God. While they are not **sons** eternally, like Jesus is, they are adopted as **sons** when they believe. This is an important idea in Hebrews, so preserve the language of kinship if possible. If your readers would misunderstand **sons**, you could express the idea by using an analogy. Alternate translation: “having brought believers, who are like Gods sons,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
197HEB210nkusfigs-abstractnounsεἰς δόξαν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “into a glorious place” or “into glorious salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
198HEB210sw9tfigs-possessionτὸν ἀρχηγὸν τῆς σωτηρίας αὐτῶν1the leader of their salvationHere the author uses the possessive form to speak of Jesus, the **founding leader**, who establishes and leads his people to **salvation**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a verbal phrase that refers to what Jesus does as **founding leader**. Alternate translation: “the one who leads them to salvation” or “their leader, who establishes their salvation,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
199HEB210l321figs-abstractnounsτῆς σωτηρίας αὐτῶν, διὰ παθημάτων1completeIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **salvation** and **sufferings**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “save” and “suffer.” Alternate translation: “who saves them through what he suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
200HEB211ky9vgrammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1the one who sanctifiesHere, **For** introduces an explanation of how believers can be called “sons” (see [2:10](../02/10.md)) and of why Jesus suffered in order to save these “sons.” If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that does introduce an explanation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Everyone who believes is a son, because” or “He saved them through sufferings because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
201HEB211jy9pfigs-explicitὅ…ἁγιάζων, καὶ οἱ ἁγιαζόμενοι1General Information:Here, **the one who sanctifies** is Jesus, and **those who are being sanctified** are believers. If your readers would misunderstand to whom these phrases refer, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the one who sanctifies, Jesus, and we who are being sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
202HEB211jzw3figs-activepassiveοἱ ἁγιαζόμενοι1those who are sanctifiedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **being sanctified** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sanctifying.” If you must state who does the action, the author implies that “Jesus” does it. Alternate translation: “those whom Jesus is sanctifying” or “those whom he is sanctifying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
203HEB211bj7ifigs-explicitἐξ ἑνὸς πάντες1have one sourceHere, **one** could refer to: (1) God the Father, who is the source of all humans and also of God the Son. Alternate translation: “all have one source, God himself” or “all have the same Father” (2) type or common origin. Alternate translation: “all have one common origin” or “{are} all humans together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
204HEB211ul23writing-pronounsοὐκ ἐπαισχύνεται1he is not ashamedHere, **he** refers back to the **the one who sanctifies**, who is Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **he** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus is not ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
205HEB211k1q5figs-litotesοὐκ ἐπαισχύνεται1is not ashamed to call them brothersHere the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
206HEB211h8rzfigs-activepassiveοὐκ ἐπαισχύνεται…καλεῖν1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **ashamed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “shaming.” Alternate translation: “he does not feel shame when he calls” or “he does not worry when others shame him for calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
207HEB211a8h9figs-gendernotationsἀδελφοὺς1brothersAlthough **brothers** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all believers, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
208HEB211gacvtranslate-kinshipἀδελφοὺς αὐτοὺς καλεῖν1In [2:10](../02/10.md), believers are called **sons** of God; here believers are called **brothers** of Jesus. Both **sons** and **brothers** refer to everyone who believes, and the terms identify how believers are part of Gods family. This is an important idea in Hebrews, so preserve the language of kinship if possible. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could express the idea by using an analogy. Alternate translation: “to refer to them as people who are like brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
209HEB212y2eswriting-quotationsλέγων1Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that Jesus the Son has spoken to God about his **brothers**. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 22:22](../../psa/22/22.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that the Son has spoken to God, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “as you can see when he says,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
210HEB212dtknfigs-quotationsλέγων, ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄνομά σου τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου; ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας ὑμνήσω σε1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “saying that he will proclaim your name to his brothers; he will sing to you in {the} midst of {the} assembly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
211HEB212cou1figs-parallelismἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄνομά σου τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου; ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας ὑμνήσω σε1Here, the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the authors culture. If your readers would misunderstand the parallelism, and if this would not be good poetry in your culture, you could combine the two statements. The author of Hebrews particularly focuses on the word **brothers**, so be sure to include that phrase in your translation. Alternate translation: “I will sing praise to you in the midst of my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
212HEB212kewmfigs-yousingularσου…σε1Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, here **you** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
213HEB212e88pfigs-metonymyτὸ ὄνομά σου1I will proclaim your name to my brothersHere, **name** figuratively refers to what the person who has that **name** is like. If your readers would misunderstand **name**, you could express the idea by referring to what the person is like. Alternate translation: “who you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
214HEB212yh0bfigs-gendernotationsτοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου1Although **brothers** is masculine, the author of the quotation is using it to refer to all those who worship God, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to my brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
215HEB212bui0translate-kinshipτοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου1Just as in [2:11](../02/11.md), the author refers to believers as **brothers** of Jesus, which identifies believers as part of Gods family. This is an important idea in Hebrews, so preserve the language of kinship if possible. See how you translated **brothers** in [2:11](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: “to the people who are like my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
216HEB212tn8nfigs-explicitἐκκλησίας1from inside the assemblyHere, the audience would know that the **assembly** was a gathering to worship God. If your readers would not make this inference, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “of {the} gathering to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
217HEB212qz6bfigs-abstractnounsἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **assembly**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “assemble” or “gather together.” Alternate translation: “in the middle of the people who assemble together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
218HEB213dx1qwriting-quotationsκαὶ πάλιν-1General Information:Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce them as quotations but instead as words that Jesus the Son has spoken. However, the audience would have understood that these are quotations from the Old Testament. The first quotation comes from [Isaiah 8:17](../../isa/08/17.md), and the second quotation comes from [Isaiah 8:18](../../isa/08/18.md). Since the author introduces these quotation as words that the Son has spoken, you should introduce the quotations as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotations are from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotations. Alternate translation: “And again he says … And again he says,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
219HEB213efbvfigs-quotationsκαὶ πάλιν, ἐγὼ ἔσομαι πεποιθὼς ἐπ’ αὐτῷ. καὶ πάλιν, ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ καὶ τὰ παιδία, ἅ μοι ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεός1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentences as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “And again he says that he will trust him. And again he says that people should behold him and the little children whom God gave him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
220HEB213s1fpwriting-pronounsαὐτῷ1And again,Here, **him** refers to God the Father. If you readers would misunderstand to whom **him** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
221HEB213y4vbfigs-exclamationsἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ1Here, **Behold** draws attention to **I and the little children**. It asks the audience to pay special attention to what follows. If your readers would misunderstand **Behold**, you could use a word or phrase that draws attention to what follows. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
222HEB213xap9translate-kinshipτὰ παιδία1the childrenHere, **little children** refers to everyone who believes. Just as Jesus is a “son” of God the Father (see [1:2](../01/02.md)), those who believe in him are also **children** of God (see also [2:10](../02/10.md)). Being **little children** who belong to God means that believers are part of Gods family and siblings of Jesus. This is an important idea in Hebrews, so preserve the language of kinship if possible. If your readers would misunderstand **little children**, you could express the idea by using an analogy. Alternate translation: “the people who are like Gods little children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
223HEB214e1iegrammar-connect-logic-resultοὖν1Here the author draws an inference from how Jesus has many “brothers,” who are also Gods **little children** (see [2:1113](../02/11.md). The word **therefore** also introduces a new development in the argument, since the author now begins to talk about what Jesus has done for those who believe. If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or a development in the argument. Alternate translation: “In light of that” or “So then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
224HEB214qj3dtranslate-kinshipτὰ παιδία1the childrenHere, **little children** refers back to the phrase as it appears in the quotation in the previous verse (see [2:13](../02/13.md)). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “the people who are like Gods little children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
225HEB214ndv2figs-idiomκεκοινώνηκεν…μετέσχεν1share in flesh and bloodHere, **share in** and **shared in** refer to having things in common. The phrases do not mean that all humans and Jesus all have a piece of **flesh and blood**. Rather, they mean that all humans and Jesus are people who are **flesh and blood**. If your readers would misunderstand **share in** and **shared in**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to some characteristic that people have in common. Alternate translation: “have in common … participated in” or “are characterized by … chose to be characterized by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
226HEB214wj5yfigs-hendiadysαἵματος καὶ σαρκός1This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The words **flesh** and **blood** together identify what it means to be human, which includes eventually dying. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “humanity” or “what it means to be human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
227HEB214fy7awriting-pronounsτῶν αὐτῶν1he likewise shared in the sameHere, **the same {things}** refers back to **flesh and blood**. If your readers would not make this connection, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the same flesh and blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
228HEB214p878figs-abstractnounsδιὰ τοῦ θανάτου1through deathIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “when he died,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
229HEB214zl92figs-possessionτὸ κράτος ἔχοντα τοῦ θανάτου1Here the author uses the possessive form to describe **power** that: (1) is based on **death**. In other words, the **power** comes from the fact that people experience **death**, which can be used to control them. In this case, the **power of death** partly comes from the “fear of death” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). Alternate translation: “who uses death to have power” (2) controls **death**. In this case, the **devil** has **power** over **death** because he tempts people to sin, which leads to death, or because he controls how people die. Alternate translation: “who has power over death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
230HEB214ij54figs-abstractnounsτὸ κράτος ἔχοντα τοῦ θανάτου1has the power of deathIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **power** and **death**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “control” and “die” or in another natural way. Be sure that your translation fits with the choice you made about how **power** and **death** relate (see the previous note). Alternate translation: “who makes use of how people die to act powerfully ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
231HEB215w3crfigs-metaphorἀπαλλάξῃ τούτους, ὅσοι φόβῳ θανάτου, διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, ἔνοχοι ἦσαν δουλείας1This was so that he would free all those who through fear of death lived all their lives in slaveryHere the author speaks as if the **fear of death** were something that could hold people in **slavery**. Taking away this **fear** is thus “releasing” those people from **slavery**. The author speaks in this way to emphasize how controlling and powerful the **fear of death** and how Jesus completely takes away the power that this **fear** had. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “might free those {people}, as many as in fear of death, throughout all {their} lives, were held tightly” or “might help those {people}, as many as continually lived in fear of death throughout all {their} lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
232HEB215w0x1figs-infostructureἀπαλλάξῃ τούτους, ὅσοι φόβῳ θανάτου, διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, ἔνοχοι ἦσαν δουλείας1If your readers would misunderstand the order of these clauses, you could arrange them in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “might release as many as were held in slavery in fear of death throughout all {their} lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
233HEB215cp8efigs-abstractnounsφόβῳ θανάτου1If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **fear** and **death**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “fear” and “die” or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “by how they fear to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
234HEB215lhv7figs-idiomδιὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν1Here, **throughout all {their} lives** refers to the entire time period when a person is alive. Use a natural form in your language to refer to the span of a persons life. Alternate translation: “during their lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
235HEB215mjxbfigs-activepassiveἔνοχοι ἦσαν δουλείας1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **held in slavery** rather than focusing on the person doing the “holding.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject, or you could state that the “devil” did it. Alternate translation: “someone held in slavery” or “the devil held in slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
236HEB215llc1figs-abstractnounsἔνοχοι…δουλείας1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **slavery**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “enslaved.” Alternate translation: “enslaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
237HEB216c31ggrammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Here, **For** introduces an explanation of why the Son shared in “flesh and blood” and died. He did this because he **takes hold of** humans, not angels. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “He did those things because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
238HEB216b3b3figs-idiomδήπου1Here, **of course** identifies the claim as something that everyone knows to be true. In other words, the author does not think that the claim needs to be proved. If your readers would misunderstand **of course**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies a claim that does not need proof. Alternate translation: “obviously” or “it is clear that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
239HEB216ewaufigs-infostructureοὐ…ἀγγέλων ἐπιλαμβάνεται, ἀλλὰ σπέρματος Ἀβραὰμ ἐπιλαμβάνεται1If your language would not put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “he takes hold of the descendant of Abraham. He does not take hold of angels.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
240HEB216meawtranslate-unknownοὐ…ἐπιλαμβάνεται…ἐπιλαμβάνεται.1Here, to **take of hold** someone could refer to: (1) how someone **takes** someone by the hand or the shoulder and leads them where they need to go. In other words, someone who **takes hold of** someone else is helping or taking care of them. Alternate translation: “he does not assist … he assists” (2) how someone **takes** someone elses specific nature or kind. In other words, Jesus took the nature of **the descendant of Abraham**, not the nature of the **angels**. Alternate translation: “he does not take the nature of … he takes the nature of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
241HEB216haspgrammar-collectivenounsσπέρματος1Here, **descendant** is a singular noun that refers to a group of “descendants.” If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the descendants” or “the group of descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
242HEB216yy68translate-kinshipσπέρματος Ἀβραὰμ1Here, the **descendant of Abraham** refers to those who are descended from **Abraham**, which are the Israelites or Jews. However, the author applies a promise made to **Abraham** to his audience, whether they were Jews or not (see [6:1320](../06/13.md)). Because of this, he thinks that each person who believes in Jesus receives the promise and is a **descendant of Abraham**. In your translation, make it clear that **descendant** is not just about physical descendants but rather about who belongs in Abrahams family, whether they were born in that family or not. Alternate translation: “the spiritual descendant of Abraham” or “each one whom God considers a descendant of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
243HEB216mklvtranslate-namesἈβραὰμ1**Abraham** is the name of a man. He was the man from whom all the Israelites and Jews came from. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
244HEB217b0o3grammar-connect-logic-resultὅθεν1Here, **from which** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what the author has argued, particularly what he wrote in [2:16](../02/16.md). Because Jesus focuses on “the descendants of Abraham,” he is **obligated to become like** them. If your readers would misunderstand **from which**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “so you can see that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
245HEB217agw2translate-unknownὤφειλεν1it was necessary for himHere the author does not mean that someone **obligated** or made Jesus **become like {his} brothers**. Rather, he means that “becoming like his brothers” was the correct or necessary way to accomplish the goal of making **atonement**. If your readers would misunderstand **he was obligated**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a necessity. Alternate translation: “it was necessary for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
246HEB217v3pwfigs-gendernotationsτοῖς ἀδελφοῖς1like his brothersAlthough **brothers** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all those who believe in Jesus, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “{his} brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
247HEB217xja5translate-kinshipτοῖς ἀδελφοῖς1Here the author refers to believers as **brothers** of Jesus, which identifies believers as part of Gods family. This is an important idea in Hebrews, so preserve the language of kinship if possible. See how you translated **brothers** in [2:1112](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: “the people who are like his brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
248HEB217uc7etranslate-unknownτὰ πρὸς τὸν Θεόν1Here **the {things} pertaining to God** identifies Jesus as a **high priest** who serves **God** and who acts as a **high priest** in Gods presence. If your readers would misunderstand **the {things} pertaining to God**, you could use a word or phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “before God” or “{concerning} God and his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
249HEB217u6chfigs-abstractnounsεἰς τὸ ἱλάσκεσθαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας τοῦ λαοῦ1he would bring about the pardon of the peoples sinsIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **atonement** and **sins**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “atone” and “sin.” Alternate translation: “in order to atone for how the people sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
250HEB218gqfogrammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Here, **For** introduces an explanation of how Jesus functions as “a merciful and faithful high priest.” If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “He can be merciful and faithful because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
251HEB218jnzjfigs-rpronounsαὐτὸς1Here, **himself** emphasizes Jesus to set up the comparison with everyone else who is **tempted**. If your readers would misunderstand **himself**, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes **he**, that is, Jesus. Alternate translation: “is one who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
252HEB218xde4figs-activepassiveπειρασθείς…πειραζομένοις1was temptedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **tempted** rather than focusing on the person or thing doing the “tempting.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject, since many things “tempt” people. Alternate translation: “things having tempted him … whom things tempt” or “having experienced temptation … who experience temptation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
253HEB218a3a6πέπονθεν αὐτὸς, πειρασθείς1who are temptedHere, **having been tempted** could identify: (1) the situation in which Jesus **suffered**. Alternate translation: “he himself had suffered when he was tempted” (2) what resulted from the “suffering.” Alternate translation: “he was tempted when he suffered”
254HEB3intromu260# Hebrews 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:14:13)\n * Exhortation: The Son is greater than Moses (3:16)\n * Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:74:11)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [3:7b11](../03/07.md), [15](../03/15.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Today”\n\nThe quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “today.” The author mentions “today” again in [3:13](../03/13.md), [15](../03/15.md). In both of these verses, he refers to how we always call the current day “today.” So, anything that happens during the time we call “today” must happen every day, since every day is “today.” In this way, the author shows that the quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) applies to his audience every day. In these verses, translate “today” with a word or phrase that someone would use for the current day. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/biblicaltimeday]])\n\n### Rest\n\nThe quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “rest.” In the context of the Psalm, this “rest” probably refers to the land that God promised to give to the Israelites. However, scholars debate what the author of Hebrews means when he uses the word “rest.” This is important because the author speaks much more about “rest” in chapter 4. There are two major options for what “rest” could mean: (1) “rest” could refer to how people rest, that is, to the state or experiencing of “resting.” (2) “rest” could refer to the place where people rest. For the author of Hebrews, this place of “rest” is either in heaven or on a renewed earth. Before you choose how to translate “rest,” consider reading [Hebrews 4:111](../../heb/04/01.md) so that you can decide what the author means when he uses “rest.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/rest]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The “house” in [3:16](../03/01.md)\n\nIn [3:16](../03/01.md), the author refers to a “house.” In the authors culture, “house” could refer to a building that people live in, or it could refer to a “household” or a group of related people. In these verses, the author uses both meanings of “house.” In [3:2](../03/02.md), [56](../03/05.md), “house” refers to a group of related people, Gods people. In [3:34](../03/03.md), “house” refers to a building that people live in. In these verses, the author uses a “house” (the building) as an example to explain more about the “house” (the people). If you do not have a word that could mean both “building” and “people,” you may need to express “house” with two different words. If so, you will need to make sure that your readers know that the author is comparing a building to people, especially in [3:34](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/house]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nThe author asks several questions in this chapter (see [3:1618](../03/16.md)). He is not asking these questions because he wants the audience to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the audience to think about the quotation from Psalm 95. In [3:1617](../03/16.md), the second question in each verse answers the first question. In [3:18](../03/18.md), the second half of the question answers the first half of the question. For ways to translate these questions, see the notes on [3:1618](../03/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The quotation from Psalm 95\n\nDavid wrote [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) many years after the events that the Psalm refers to. You can read the story about these events in [Num 14:138](../../num/14/01.md) (see also the related story in [Exodus 17:17](../../exo/17/01.md)). In these stories, the Israelites complain and disobey God, and God punishes them. David refers back to these stories to encourage the Israelites whom he ruled to act differently. He wanted them to listen to and obey God. The author of Hebrews quotes what David wrote for a similar reason. He wants to encourage his audience to listen to and obey God, and he shows that what David wrote still applies to his audience. Consider reading the Old Testament stories and Psalm 95 before translating this chapter. See the notes for places where the author refers directly to Psalm 95 or to the Old Testament stories. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])\n\n### What does “for 40 years” modify?\n\nIn [3:10](../03/10.md), “for 40 years” tells how long the Israelites saw Gods works. However, in [3:17](../03/17.md), it refers to the time during which God “was upset” with the Israelites. This is not a contradiction, because the author knew that the Israelites saw Gods works and that God was upset with them during the same period of “40 years.” There is no need to harmonize these two verses.
255HEB31m1cvgrammar-connect-logic-resultὅθεν1Connecting Statement:Here, **Therefore** introduces an inference from what the author has said about Jesus in [2:518](../02/05.md). If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that clearly introduces an inference. Alternate translation: “As a result of all that” or “Because of those things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
256HEB31tp7efigs-gendernotationsἀδελφοὶ1holy brothersAlthough **brothers** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all believers, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
257HEB31af15figs-possessionκλήσεως ἐπουρανίου, μέτοχοι1you share in a heavenly callingHere the author uses the possessive form to indicate that believers “share” a **heavenly calling**. Believers could “share” this **calling** with: (1) other believers. Alternate translation: “who share together in a heavenly calling” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “share with Jesus a heavenly calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
258HEB31cnk1figs-abstractnounsκλήσεως ἐπουρανίου, μέτοχοι1If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **sharers** and **calling**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “share” and “call.” Alternate translation: “those who share how God has called us in a heavenly way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
259HEB31wb5fκλήσεως ἐπουρανίου1Here, **heavenly** could indicate that the **calling** (1) comes from “heaven” (see how Gods voice comes from heaven in [12:2526](../12/25.md)). Alternate translation: “of a calling from heaven” (2) directs us toward “heaven.” Alternate translation: “of a calling to heaven” or “of a calling to enter heaven”
260HEB31zma3translate-unknownτὸν ἀπόστολον1the apostle and high priestHere, **apostle** refers to someone who has been sent. In this passage, it does not refer to any of the twelve “apostles.” If your readers would misunderstand **apostle**, you could use a descriptive phrase instead of the word you normally use for the twelve “apostles.” Alternate translation: “the sent one” or “the ambassador” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
261HEB31hfycfigs-possessionτὸν ἀπόστολον καὶ ἀρχιερέα τῆς ὁμολογίας ἡμῶν1Here the author uses the possessive form to speak about the **apostle** and the **high priest** who is the main content of **our confession**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the apostle and high priest whom we confess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
262HEB31mnd4figs-abstractnounsτῆς ὁμολογίας ἡμῶν1of our confessionIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confession**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “confess” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “whom we confess” or “in whom we believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
263HEB32m4dhwriting-pronounsτῷ ποιήσαντι1Here, **the one who appointed** is God the Father. If your readers would not know who **the one who appointed** is, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “to God, who appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
264HEB32my64translate-namesΜωϋσῆς1**Moses** is the name of a man. God had him lead the Israelites when he delivered them from being slaves in the land of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
265HEB32u5qcfigs-extrainfoὡς καὶ Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ1Here the author uses words that are very similar to the Greek translation of [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md). It is possible that he is thinking of that verse or directly referencing it. However, he does not introduce the words as a quotation or indicate that he is referring to another text. So, you should not include any quotation information in your translation. If you wish to refer to [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md), you could do so with a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
266HEB32eqp7figs-metaphorἐν τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ1in Gods houseHere, **house** figuratively refers to a group of people, here the Israelites. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “among Gods tribe” or “in his clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
267HEB32k4u8writing-pronounsαὐτοῦ1Here, **his** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand **his**, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “Gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
268HEB32wnzntranslate-textvariantsτῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ1Instead of **his house**, many ancient manuscripts have the phrase “all his house.” This phrase is in the Old Testament story about **Moses** (see [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md)). So, it is possible that scribes added “all” to **his house** because they knew this passage. Unless there is a good reason to use “all his house,” you should use **his house**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
269HEB33os46translate-versebridge0To help your readers understand the authors main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put the general principle about buildings and builders in a first sentence and the application of that general principle in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “For every house is built by someone, and the one building {the house} has greater honor {than} the house. According to that much, since God {is} the one who built all {things}, this one has been considered worthy of greater glory than Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
270HEB33b1zpwriting-pronounsοὗτος1Here, **this one** refers to Jesus, the Son. If your readers would misunderstand **this one**, you could clarify to whom it refers. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
271HEB33py5nfigs-activepassiveοὗτος…ἠξίωται1Jesus has been consideredIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who **has been considered worthy** rather than focusing on the person doing the “considering.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has considered this one worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
272HEB33yl7dfigs-abstractnounsπλείονος…δόξης1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to be more glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
273HEB33c7ertranslate-namesΜωϋσῆν1**Moses** is the name of a man. God had him lead the Israelites when he delivered them from being slaves in the land of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
274HEB33w8v5figs-abstractnounsπλείονα τιμὴν ἔχει…ὁ κατασκευάσας αὐτόν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **honor**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “honorable.” Alternate translation: “more honorable the one building {the house} is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
275HEB33i68fτοῦ οἴκου…αὐτόν1Here the author uses **house** nonfiguratively to refer to a building or structure. He wants his readers to apply what is true about a **house** (the building) to the “house” (the people). If you used a different word for “house” in the previous verses, make sure that your readers know that the author is drawing a comparison between people and houses here. Alternate translation: “the structure … {than} the structure”
276HEB34wvw1figs-activepassiveπᾶς…οἶκος κατασκευάζεται ὑπό τινος1every house is built by someoneIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **house** that is **built** rather than focusing on the person doing the “building.” Alternate translation: “someone built every house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
277HEB34aya1πᾶς…οἶκος1Here, just as in [3:3](../03/03.md), the author uses **house** nonfiguratively to refer to a building or structure. He wants his readers to apply what is true about a **house** (the building) to the “house” (the people). If you used a different word for “house” in the previous verses, make sure that your readers know that the author is drawing a comparison between people and houses here. Alternate translation: “every structure”
278HEB34f8n8figs-metaphorὁ…πάντα κατασκευάσας1the one who built everythingHere the author speaks as if everything that God created were a “house” that God **built**. He speaks in this to connect Gods act of creation with the “house” and “building” language. Use the same word or phrase here that you used for **built** earlier in the verse. If necessary, you could express the idea with an analogy. Alternate translation: “the one who was like a builder when he created all {things}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
279HEB35c8whfigs-extrainfoΜωϋσῆς μὲν πιστὸς ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ, ὡς θεράπων1Here, just as in [3:2](../03/02.md), the author uses words that are very similar to the Greek translation of [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md). It is possible that he is thinking of that verse or directly referencing it. However, he does not introduce the words as a quotation or indicate that he is referring to another text. So, you should not include any quotation information in your translation. If you wish to refer to [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md), you could do so with a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
280HEB35zjnatranslate-namesΜωϋσῆς1**Moses** is the name of a man. God had him lead the Israelites when he delivered them from being slaves in the land of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
281HEB35d57qfigs-metaphorἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ1in Gods entire houseHere, **house** figuratively refers to a group of people, here the Israelites. See how you translated **house** in [Hebrews 3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “among Gods entire tribe” or “in his entire clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
282HEB35uz5dwriting-pronounsαὐτοῦ1Here, **his** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand **his**, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “Gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
283HEB35m4xrfigs-abstractnounsεἰς μαρτύριον τῶν1bearing witness about the thingsIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **testimony**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “testify” or “proclaim.” Alternate translation: “to testify to the things that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
284HEB35u37wfigs-explicitτῶν λαληθησομένων1Here the author does not clarify what exactly is **spoken**. He may be referring to what God the Father said about the Son in chapter 1, or he could be referring in general to the good news about Jesus. If your readers need to know what is **spoken**, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the good news that would be spoken in the future” or “of the things that would be spoken about Jesus in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
285HEB35gt8cfigs-activepassiveλαληθησομένων1were to be spoken of in the futureIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the words that are **spoken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “speaking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God would speak in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
286HEB36nsfgfigs-ellipsisΧριστὸς…ὡς Υἱὸς1Here the author omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete thought. He omits these words because he stated them in the previous verse (“was faithful”). If your language needs these words to make a complete thought, you could include them here. Alternate translation: “Christ was faithful as a Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
287HEB36dgt5guidelines-sonofgodprinciplesΥἱὸς1Son**Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. See how you translated this word in [1:2](../01/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
288HEB36pfrjfigs-explicitἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ1Here, **over his house** contrasts with how Moses was “in his entire house” (see [3:5](../03/05.md)). The phrase **over his house** indicates that the **Son** rules or is in charge of the **house**. If your readers would misunderstand the implications of **over his house**, you could make them explicit. Alternate translation: “in charge of his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
289HEB36djm7figs-metaphorἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς1in charge of Gods houseHere, **house** figuratively refers to a group of people, here Gods people. See how you translated house in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “over his clan (whose clan we are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
290HEB36x89xwriting-pronounsαὐτοῦ, οὗ1Here, **his* and **whose** refer to God. If your readers would misunderstand **his** and **whose**, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “Gods … whose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
291HEB36u94pfigs-infostructureοἶκον…οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς, ἐὰν τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος κατάσχωμεν.1This sentence transitions from what the author has said about Gods **house**, Jesus, and Moses to an exhortation to continue to **hold fast**. The ULT has connected the sentence to the preceding information but put it in parentheses to indicate that it is slightly disconnected. Consider a natural way to include a transition sentence in your language. Alternate translation: “house. We are his house if we hold fast to the confidence and the boasting of {our} hope.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
292HEB36tlakgrammar-connect-condition-hypotheticalἐὰν1Here the author uses the conditional form to show that “holding fast” leads to being Gods **house**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
293HEB36v817translate-unknownκατάσχωμεν1Here, **hold fast** refers to continuing to firmly believe or trust something, particularly something that one has been told. If your readers would misunderstand **hold fast**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to continuing to believe or trust. Alternate translation: “we tightly grasp” or “we remain in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
294HEB36kp9yfigs-abstractnounsτὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος κατάσχωμεν1if we hold fast to our courage and the hope of which we boastIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confidence**, **boasting**, and **hope**, you could express ideas by using a verbs and adjectives or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “we keep being confident and proud about what we hope for” or “we continue to boldly await and speak joyfully about the things that we expect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
295HEB36br2zfigs-possessionτὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος1Here the author uses the possessive form to describe **confidence** and **boasting** about or concerning **{our} hope**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could use a more natural construction. Alternate translation: “the confidence and the boasting concerning {our} hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
296HEB37qry7grammar-connect-logic-resultδιό1Here, **Therefore** introduces an exhortation that is based on the claim from the previous verse that we are his “house” as long as “we hold fast” (see [3:6](../03/06.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an exhortation that is based on a previous statement. Alternate translation: “So then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
297HEB37c4slwriting-quotationsκαθὼς λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον1General Information:Here and in the next four verses, the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. The audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 95:7b11](../../psa/95/07.md), which refers to a story that can be found in [Numbers 14:138](../../num/14/01.md). See the chapter introduction for more information about this story. Since the author introduces this quotation as words that the **Holy Spirit says**, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “as says the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
298HEB37vciofigs-quotationsκαθὼς λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, σήμερον ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the clause as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the next four verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “you should do just what the Holy Spirit says: that today, if you hear his voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
299HEB37ntzktranslate-unknownσήμερον1Here, **today** refers to the period of time between when the sun rises and when it rises again. Even more specifically, it identifies that this period of time is the current one. If your readers would misunderstand **Today**, you could use a word or phrase that refers clearly to that current time period. Alternate translation: “Right now” or “At this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
300HEB37u66qgrammar-connect-condition-factἐὰν1if you hear his voiceHere the author is speaking as if “hearing his voice” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the author is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “when.” Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
301HEB37vjjnwriting-pronounsαὐτοῦ1Here, **his** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand **his*, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “Gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
302HEB38i2jefigs-quotationsμὴ σκληρύνητε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐν τῷ παραπικρασμῷ, κατὰ τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ πειρασμοῦ, ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ,1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this verse as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the surrounding verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “you should not harden your hearts as in the provocation, during the day of testing in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
303HEB38gl2kfigs-idiomμὴ σκληρύνητε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν1do not harden your heartsWhen someone “hardens their heart,” it means that they being stubborn and refusing to listen or respond to someone else. If you have a figurative or idiomatic way to refer to this behavior, you could use it here. If you do not have a figurative way to refer to this behavior, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “do not be stubborn” or “do not be headstrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
304HEB38uu0dfigs-explicitὡς ἐν τῷ παραπικρασμῷ, κατὰ τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ πειρασμοῦ, ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ1While the quotation primarily refers to the story about how the Israelites did not enter the land that God promised them (see [Numbers 14:138](../../num/14/01.md)), there is another story that the author of the quotation may be referring to. In [Exodus 17:17](../../exo/17/01.md), the Israelites are thirsty while they are in the **wilderness**, and they “provoke” and “test” God by complaining. God provides water for them, and Moses names one of the places where they were “Testing” (see [Exodus 17:7](../../exo/17/07.md)). It is quite possible that the author of the quotation is thinking about this story. If your readers would misunderstand what the author is referring to here, you could include some extra information or use a footnote to refer to the stories. Alternate translation: “as when the Israelite ancestors provoked God during the day in which they tested him in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
305HEB38lik3figs-abstractnounsἐν τῷ παραπικρασμῷ1as in the rebellion, in the time of testing in the wildernessIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **provocation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “provoke.” Alternate translation: “when God was provoked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
306HEB38kddyfigs-possessionτὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ πειρασμοῦ1Here the author uses the possessive form to identify a **day** on which **testing** occurred. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the day when they tested God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
307HEB39e6n7figs-quotationsοὗ ἐπείρασαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν ἐν δοκιμασίᾳ, καὶ εἶδον τὰ ἔργα μου,1General Information:If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this verse as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the surrounding verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “where your fathers tested {him} by examination, and they saw his works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
308HEB39i3wbtranslate-kinshipοἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν1your ancestorsHere, **your fathers** refers to the Israelites who were alive before Jesus lived on earth. The audience of the original quotation were Israelites who descended from these people. Use a word or phrase that refers to ancestors. Alternate translation: “your forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
309HEB39bbzvfigs-gendernotationsοἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν1Although **fathers** is masculine, it refers to any ancestors, both male and female. If your readers would misunderstand **fathers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “your fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
310HEB39uj2zfigs-123personοὗ ἐπείρασαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν…μου1Beginning in this verse, God speaks directly using first person pronouns. In the previous two verses, the author of the quotation refers to God in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this change, you could use the same person for the pronouns throughout the quotation, or you could indicate that God is speaking directly here. Alternate translation: “where, as God says, your fathers tested {me} … my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
311HEB39td5wfigs-doubletἐπείρασαν…ἐν δοκιμασίᾳ1Here, **tested** and **examination** refer to basically the same thing. The word **tested** refers to the act of “testing,” while **examination** refers to the “test” itself. The author of the quotation uses both words to emphasize how the **fathers** “examined” God. If your readers would misunderstand why the author includes both words, and if using both words is not emphatic in your language, you could express the idea with one word or phrase. Alternate translation: “examined {me}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
312HEB39q7c2figs-abstractnounsἐν δοκιμασίᾳ1by testing meIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **examination**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “examine.” Alternate translation: “by examining me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
313HEB39k3kffigs-abstractnounsτὰ ἔργα μου1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “perform” or “do.” Alternate translation: “what I performed” or “what I did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
314HEB39fg7nfigs-explicitκαὶ εἶδον τὰ ἔργα μου1Here, **they saw my works** could refer to: (1) how the **fathers tested** God even though they **saw** the amazing **works** that God did to rescue them and bring them through the wilderness. Alternate translation: “even though they saw my powerful deeds” (2) how God acted to punish the **fathers** for how they **tested** him. Alternate translation: “and they saw how I punished them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
315HEB310cgs9figs-quotationsτεσσεράκοντα ἔτη. διὸ προσώχθισα τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, καὶ εἶπον, ἀεὶ πλανῶνται τῇ καρδίᾳ; αὐτοὶ δὲ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τὰς ὁδούς μου1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this verse as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the surrounding verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “for 40 years. Therefore, he was upset with that generation, and he said, They are always going astray in {their} hearts, and they have not known my ways.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
316HEB310qap2figs-infostructureτεσσεράκοντα ἔτη1Here, **for 40 years** goes with the end of the previous verse and tells how long “they saw my works” ([3:9](../03/09.md)). You could include these words at the end of verse 9, or you could include them here in verse 10 and show with punctuation that they belong with the previous sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
317HEB310upb8translate-unknownπροσώχθισα1I was displeasedHere, **I was upset** indicates that God was properly angry or displeased with the Israelites. If your readers would misunderstand **I was upset**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to proper or appropriate anger and displeasure. Alternate translation: “I was displeased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
318HEB310ohlhfigs-123personδιὸ προσώχθισα…εἶπον1Just as in [3:9](../03/09.md), God speaks directly using first person pronouns. However, in [3:78](../03/07.md), the author of the quotation refers to God in the third person. Use the same translation strategy that you used in [3:9](../03/09.md). Alternate translation: “Therefore, as God says, I was upset … I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
319HEB310bfu5figs-quotesinquotesεἶπον, ἀεὶ πλανῶνται τῇ καρδίᾳ; αὐτοὶ δὲ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τὰς ὁδούς μου;1If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I said that they are always going astray in {their} hearts, and they have not known my ways.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
320HEB310lz7nfigs-parallelismἀεὶ πλανῶνται τῇ καρδίᾳ; αὐτοὶ δὲ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τὰς ὁδούς μου1Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the authors culture. If your readers would misunderstand the parallelism, and if this would not be good poetry in your culture, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “They are always going astray from my ways in their hearts” or “Their hearts have never know my ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
321HEB310kh4vfigs-metaphorἀεὶ πλανῶνται1They have always gone astray in their heartsHere the author of the quotation speaks as if the Israelites were traveling down the wrong road. He speaks in this way to indicate that they were not following God properly. Someone who is **going astray** does not want to do what is right. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “They are not following me” or “They are happy to disobey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
322HEB310rmqhfigs-metonymyτῇ καρδίᾳ1In the authors culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. If your readers would misunderstand **hearts**, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “in {their} minds” or “in what they plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
323HEB310l5t7figs-metaphorτὰς ὁδούς μου1They have not known my waysHere, God speaks as if he has **ways** or paths on which he walks. When the audience does not know these **ways**, that means that they do not know what God wants or values. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “how I want them to conduct their lives” or “what I value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
324HEB311mu48grammar-connect-words-phrasesὡς1Here, **As** could introduce: (1) a result from what the ancestors did. Alternate translation: “So” or “Therefore,” (2) a reason why the people will not **enter into my rest**. If you choose this option, you may need to include some implied information about how the ancestors did not **enter** the **rest**. Alternate translation: “They did not enter the land that I had promised, just as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
325HEB311ipk1figs-quotationsὡς ὤμοσα ἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου.1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this verse as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in previous verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “for 40 years. Therefore, he was upset with that generation, and he said, They are always going astray in {their} hearts, and they have not known my ways.’” “As he swore in his wrath, If they will enter into my rest … !’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
326HEB311yyhzfigs-abstractnounsἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wrath**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “wrathful” or “angry.” Alternate translation: “as I was wrathful” or “angrily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
327HEB311kl9efigs-quotesinquotesὤμοσα ἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου.1If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I swore in my wrath that they would never enter into my rest … !” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
328HEB311h967grammar-connect-condition-contraryεἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου1Here God uses **If** to introduce a statement that he knows will not be true. What the form means is that **they** will definitely not **enter into my rest**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “They will never enter into my rest!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
329HEB311tz3lfigs-explicitεἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου1They will never enter my restHere, **rest** could refer to: (1) the state of “resting.” Alternate translation: “they will participate in the way that I rest” or “they will rest with me” (2) the place where people rest, particularly the land that God promised to give to his people. Alternate translation: “they will enter into my resting place” or “they will enter into the land of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
330HEB311tsovfigs-abstractnounsκατάπαυσίν μου1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **rest**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rest.” Make sure that your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the way that I rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
331HEB312m9tfβλέπετε1Alternate translation: “Be careful”
332HEB312gv84figs-gendernotationsἀδελφοί1brothersAlthough **brothers** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all believers, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
333HEB312lma5figs-metonymyἔν τινι ὑμῶν καρδία πονηρὰ ἀπιστίας1there will not be anyone with an evil heart of unbelief, a heart that turns away from the living GodIn the authors culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and plan. If your readers would misunderstand **heart**, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea nonfiguratively. See how you translated “hearts” in [3:10](../03/10.md). Alternate translation: “in any of you a wicked mind of unbelief” or “wicked thinking of unbelief in any of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
334HEB312gua2figs-possessionκαρδία πονηρὰ ἀπιστίας1Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **heart** that is characterized by **unbelief**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “a wicked heart that does not believe” or “a wicked and unbelieving heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
335HEB312d5nyfigs-abstractnounsἀπιστίας1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **unbelief**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “disbelieve” or an adjective such as “unbelieving.” Alternate translation: “that disbelieves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
336HEB312msirgrammar-connect-time-simultaneousἐν τῷ ἀποστῆναι1Here, **in the falling away** refers to something that happens at the same time as having **a wicked heart of unbelief**. If your readers would misunderstand **in the falling away**, you could use a form that introduces simultaneous action. Alternate translation: “while you fall away” or “which falls away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
337HEB312d2j6figs-metaphorἐν τῷ ἀποστῆναι ἀπὸ1Here the author speaks of rejecting or failing to follow God as if the person “fell away” from where God is. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “in the turning away from” or “in rejecting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
338HEB312kjm7figs-idiomΘεοῦ ζῶντος1the living GodHere, **the living God** identifies God as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives “life.” The primary point is that God actually “lives,” unlike idols and other things that people call “god.” If your readers would misunderstand **the living God**, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really “lives.” Alternate translation: “the God who lives” or “the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
339HEB313d3k2writing-quotationsἄχρις οὗ, τὸ σήμερον, καλεῖται1as long as it is called “today,”Here the author refers to **today** in such a way that the audience would know that he was referring to how the quotation used the word **today** (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Use a form in your language that shows that the author is referring back to the quotation. Alternate translation: “as long as it is called today, as the psalmist wrote,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
340HEB313jn9sfigs-idiomἄχρις οὗ, τὸ σήμερον, καλεῖται1Here the author speaks about a time that we call **today**. We call every day **today**, so this phrase means that we should **exhort one another** all the time. However, since the author uses **today** because the author of the quotation uses it, make sure that you use the same words that you used to translate **today** in [3:7](../03/07.md). Alternate translation: “as long as we live in the time that we call this day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
341HEB313m1e7figs-activepassiveμὴ σκληρυνθῇ τις ἐξ ὑμῶν ἀπάτῃ τῆς ἁμαρτίας1no one among you will be hardened by the deceitfulness of sinIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **hardened** rather than focusing on what does the “hardening.” Alternate translation: “{the} deceitfulness of sin hardens no one among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
342HEB313b198figs-metaphorσκληρυνθῇ…ἀπάτῃ τῆς ἁμαρτίας1no one among you will be hardened by the deceitfulness of sinHere the author speaks of becoming stubborn or unwilling to obey or trust in God as if the person were **hardened**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “becomes stubborn because of {the} deceitfulness of sin” or “stops trusting God because of {the} deceitfulness of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
343HEB313enjyfigs-possessionἀπάτῃ τῆς ἁμαρτίας1Here the author uses the possessive form to characterize **sin** as something that has **deceitfulness**. If your readers would misunderstand that **sin** “deceives,” you could express the idea more naturally. Alternate translation: “by sin deceiving you” or “by the way that sin deceives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
344HEB313sye2figs-abstractnounsἀπάτῃ τῆς ἁμαρτίας1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **deceitfulness**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “deceive” or an adjective such as “deceitful.” Alternate translation: “by how sin deceives” or “by deceitful sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
345HEB314znu5grammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1General Information:Here, **For** introduces a reason why the audience should “exhort one another” (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “You should do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
346HEB314f52jfigs-possessionμέτοχοι…τοῦ Χριστοῦ γεγόναμεν1For we have becomeHere the author uses the possessive form to indicate that believers “share” **Christ**. See how you translated **sharers** in [3:1](../03/01.md). More specifically, **sharers of Christ** could mean that believers: (1) “share” the promise and the blessings together with **Christ**. Alternate translation: “we have with Christ shared the blessings” (2) “share” or participate in **Christ** himself. Alternate translation: “we have shared in Christ” or “we have participated in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
347HEB314e753grammar-connect-condition-hypotheticalἐάνπερ1if we firmly hold to our confidence in himHere the author uses the conditional form to show that “holding firm” leads to being **sharers of Christ**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
348HEB314zskgtranslate-unknownβεβαίαν κατάσχωμεν1Here, **hold firm** refers to continuing to firmly believe or trust something, particularly something that one has been told. If your readers would misunderstand **hold firm**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to continuing to believe or trust. See how you expressed the similar idea in [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “we tightly grasp” or “we remain in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
349HEB314j3aqfigs-abstractnounsτὴν ἀρχὴν τῆς ὑποστάσεως1from the beginningIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **beginning** and **confidence**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “began” and “trust.” Alternate translation: “from the time when we first believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
350HEB314l9enfigs-euphemismμέχρι τέλους1to the endHere, **the end** could be: (1) a polite way of referring to when a person dies. Alternate translation: “until our lives end” (2) the **end** of the world, when Jesus comes back. Alternate translation: “until Jesus comes back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
351HEB315yxn7figs-infostructureἐν τῷ λέγεσθαι1This verse could: (1) conclude the exhortations in [3:1214](../03/12.md) by stating when the audience should follow these exhortations. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “Do these things while it is said” (2) introduce what will be discussed in [3:1619](../03/16.md). If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “Hear again what is said:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
352HEB315bym1figs-activepassiveλέγεσθαι1it has been saidIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **said** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that the “Holy Spirit” did it (see [3:7](../03/07.md). Alternate translation: “during the time when the Holy Spirit speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
353HEB315wa11writing-quotationsἐν τῷ λέγεσθαι1if you hear his voiceHere the author uses **it is said** to requote a part of the quotation that he introduced earlier (see especially [3:7b8a](../03/07.md)). If your readers would misunderstand that the author is requoting the previous quotation to focus on a specific portion of it, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that has already been quoted. Alternate translation: “while the words I have already quoted are said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
354HEB315j8dhfigs-quotationsἐν τῷ λέγεσθαι, σήμερον ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε, μὴ σκληρύνητε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐν τῷ παραπικρασμῷ.1as in the rebellionIf you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the clause as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “while it is said that today, if you hear his voice, you should not harden your hearts as in the rebellion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
355HEB315zn0dσήμερον ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε, μὴ σκληρύνητε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐν τῷ παραπικρασμῷ1Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [3:7b8a](../03/07.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in those verses.
356HEB316inhsgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, **For** introduces [3:1619](../03/16.md), which further explain the quotation. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “In the quotation,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
357HEB316b4jyfigs-rquestionτίνες…ἀκούσαντες παρεπίκραναν? ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντες οἱ ἐξελθόντες ἐξ Αἰγύπτου διὰ Μωϋσέως?1The author does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The second question gives the answer to the first question: “it was those who came out from Egypt through Moses.” If your readers would misunderstand these questions, you could express the idea by using a form that identifies those **who heard** and **provoked** with **all those who came out from Egypt through Moses**. Alternate translation: “you know who they are who heard and provoked {him}. It was all those who came out from Egypt through Moses.” or “which ones who heard provoked {him}? It was all those who came out from Egypt through Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
358HEB316pwl2figs-distinguishἀκούσαντες…ἐξελθόντες1Who was it who heard God and rebelled? Was it not all those who came out of Egypt through Moses?Here, **who heard** and **who came out** introduce phrases that distinguish or identify the people that the author is speaking about. Use a form in your language identifies, not one that simply describes. Alternate translation: “that heard … that came out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
359HEB316ldi4ἀκούσαντες παρεπίκραναν1The author uses **heard** and **provoked** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. See how you translated “hear his voice” in [3:7](../03/07.md) and “provocation” in [3:8](../03/08.md). Alternate translation: “who heard his voice participated in the provocation”
360HEB316yfddfigs-goοἱ ἐξελθόντες1Here, **came out** refers to leaving a country or area. Use a word for this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “those who went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
361HEB316j14dtranslate-namesἐξ Αἰγύπτου1**Egypt** is the name of a country in northern Africa. The Israelites were slaves in this country until they **came out from** it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
362HEB316djjatranslate-namesδιὰ Μωϋσέως1**Moses** is the name of a man. God had him lead the Israelites when he delivered them from being slaves in the land of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
363HEB317swy4figs-rquestionτίσιν…προσώχθισεν τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη? οὐχὶ τοῖς ἁμαρτήσασιν, ὧν τὰ κῶλα ἔπεσεν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ?1With whom was he angry for forty years? Was it not with those who sinned, whose dead bodies fell in the wilderness?The author does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The second question gives the answer to the first question: “it was those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” If your readers would misunderstand these questions, you could express the idea by using a form that identifies those **with whom he was upset** with **those who sinned**. Alternate translation: “you know who they are with whom he was upset for 40 years. It was with those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” or “with whom was he upset for 40 years? It was with those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
364HEB317goidπροσώχθισεν τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη1The author uses **was he upset** and **for 40 years** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. See how you translated “I was upset” and “for 40 years” in [3:10](../03/10.md). Alternate translation: “was he displeased for those 40 years”
365HEB317uhgafigs-idiomὧν τὰ κῶλα ἔπεσεν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ1The author uses these words because he found them in [Numbers 14:29](../../num/14/29.md), where God tells Moses what is going to happen to **those who sinned**. The phrase **corpses fell** refers to people dying. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to people dying. Alternate translation: “who fell down dead in the wilderness” or “who were buried in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
366HEB318l1gcfigs-rquestionτίσιν…ὤμοσεν μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἀπειθήσασιν?1To whom did he swear that they would not enter his rest, if it was not to those who disobeyed him?The author does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The second half of the question gives the answer to the first half: “it was those who disobeyed.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea by using a form that identifies those **who disobeyed** with “those to whom he swore.” Alternate translation: “you know who they are to whom he swore that they would not enter into his rest. It was to those who disobeyed.” or “to whom did he swear that they would not enter into his rest? It was to those who disobeyed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
367HEB318q16uὤμοσεν μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ1they would not enter his restThe author uses **they would not enter into his rest** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. See how you translated “If they will enter into my rest” in [3:11](../03/11.md). Alternate translation: “did he swear, they will never enter into my rest,’”
368HEB319imppgrammar-connect-words-phrasesκαὶ1Here, **And** introduces a summary or conclusion for the argument, especially for what the author has said in [3:1618](../03/16.md). If your readers would misunderstand **And**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a summary or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
369HEB319henzfigs-infostructureβλέπομεν ὅτι οὐκ ἠδυνήθησαν εἰσελθεῖν δι’ ἀπιστίαν1If your language would naturally put the reason before the result, you could rearrange the sentence. The author puts **because of unbelief** last in order to emphasize it, so use a form that emphasizes this phrase. Alternate translation: “we that it was because of unbelief that they were not able to enter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
370HEB319u2mofigs-metaphorβλέπομεν1Here the author uses **we see** figuratively to refer to knowing or understanding something. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “we learn” or “we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
371HEB319evf1figs-explicitεἰσελθεῖν1Here the author uses **enter** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. Translate **enter** the same way that you did in [3:11](../03/11.md). If your readers would misunderstand that **enter** refers back to this quotation, you could make the reference more explicit. Alternate translation: “to enter into Gods rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
372HEB319x18zfigs-abstractnounsδι’ ἀπιστίαν1because of unbeliefIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **unbelief**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “did not believe” or an adjective such as “unbelieving.” Alternate translation: “because they were unbelieving” or “because they refused to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
373HEB4introu72n0# Hebrews 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:14:13)\n * Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:74:11)\n * Exhortation: The power of Gods word (4:1213)\n4. Summary statement (4:1416)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [4:35](../04/03.md), [7](../04/07.md), which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Gods rest\n\nThe author continues to refer to “rest” in this chapter. This time, he also includes how God “rested” after he created everything. Continue to translate “rest” the way you did in chapter 3. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/rest]])\n\n### “Today”\n\nThe quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “today.” Much like in the previous chapter, the author references “today” several times (see [4:78](../04/07.md)). In [4:7](../04/07.md), he refers to how we always call the current day “today.” This means that the “rest” is available “today,” or right now. In [4:8](../04/08.md), the author refers to “another day” that happens after Joshua led the Israelites into the promised land. This refers again to “today” from the Psalm quotation. In these verses, translate “today” with a word or phrase that someone would use for the current day or time, and translate “day” so that it is clear that it refers to “today.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/biblicaltimeday]])\n\n### Joshua, David, and the audience\n\nIn [4:79](../04/07.md), the author makes an argument that is based on sequence in time. First, Joshua led the Israelites into the promised land. Many years later, God spoke through David that people could enter the rest “today.” Finally, the author quotes these words to his audience after Jesus died and rose again. The authors point is that what Joshua led the Israelites into could not count as “rest” because David was still speaking about entering the “rest” many years later. The author argues that this means that the words about entering the rest still apply when he himself is writing this letter. When you translate these verses, make sure that your readers understand that the author is making an argument based on sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])\n\n### Jesus the high priest\n\nIn [4:1415](../04/14.md), much like in [2:17](../02/17.md), the author refers to Jesus as a “priest,” here specifically a “high priest.” This is an important theme in Hebrews. In much of the rest of the letter, the author argues that Jesus is a high priest who offers a sacrifice in the heavenly sanctuary. Here the author begins to develop that theme by showing that Jesus is a sympathetic and merciful high priest. Translate “high priest” like you did in [2:17](../02/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The word of God as a sword\n\nIn [4:12](../04/12.md), the author says that Gods word is “sharper than any two-edged sword,” and it can “pierce” and “divide” peoples joints and marrow and their souls and spirits. The author makes this comparison because he wants to show that God uses his “word” to discern and judge everything, even things that are very hard to know or understand. Just like a sharp sword can cut anything apart, even things that are securely fastened together, so God uses his “word” to get to the core of what every person is and thinks. If possible, preserve the comparison between Gods word and a sharp blade, since this is an important metaphor that appears in other biblical books. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Who “speaks” the quotations?\n\nIn [4:35](../04/03.md), [7](../04/07.md), the author refers to the person who “speaks” the quotations as “he.” Since the author identified the Holy Spirit as the one who “speaks” Psalm 95, it is likely that he is referring to the Holy Spirit again as the speaker of these quotations. However, it is also possible that the author means that God considered as a whole speaks these quotations, or perhaps the author is avoiding identifying the speaker. If possible, preserve the ambiguity by referring simply to “he” or an unnamed person. If necessary, you could make it more explicit that the “Holy Spirit” or “God” speaks these words. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])\n\n### The logic of [4:37](../04/03.md)\n\nIn [4:37](../04/03.md), the author uses [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) to comment on [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md). This is a complicated argument, and it is likely that the author is making several points. \n\nFirst (1), he could be identifying the “rest” as the result of Gods “works.” In other words, the “rest” is something that God finished and then enjoyed on the seventh day. The author uses [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) to show that the “rest” has been completed since God created the world. This means that the “rest” to which [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md) refers has been available since then. This explains why the author says that the “rest” remains for some to enter (see [4:6](../04/06.md)). \n\nSecond (2), he could be using what [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) says about “rest” to define what “rest” means in [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md). In the Psalm, the “rest” would have originally referred primarily to the promised land. However, the author uses how God “rested” on the seventh day to define the “rest” primarily as something that people do with God rather than as a place. This explains why the author defines “entering the rest” as “resting from works” (see [4:10](../04/10.md)).\n\nSince the author does not include much explanation and instead quotes the two verses together, you should also put the two verses together without including much explanation. See the notes for specific translation decisions. The author gives some conclusions in [4:610](../04/06.md), so focus on translating these verses clearly.
374HEB41ay25grammar-connect-logic-resultοὖν1ThereforeHere, **Therefore** introduces an exhortation that is based on everything that the author has said about the Israelite ancestors in [3:719](../03/07.md). If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an exhortation that is based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
375HEB41n98mfigs-doublenegativesφοβηθῶμεν…μήποτε καταλειπομένης1Connecting Statement:If your readers would misunderstand why the author puts two negative words together, you could express **be afraid lest** with a positive statement. The author uses this construction for emphasis, so use an emphatic form in your language. Alternate translation: “let us be careful so that while there remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
376HEB41ti1xfigs-idiomμήποτε καταλειπομένης ἐπαγγελίας εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ1When a **promise** **remains**, people can still receive what is promised. In other words, the promise is still valid or true. If your readers would misunderstand a **promise** remaining, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “lest while a promise to enter into his rest is still valid” or “lest while God still offers a promise to enter into his rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
377HEB41zta2figs-abstractnounsμήποτε καταλειπομένης ἐπαγγελίας εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ1none of you might seem to have failed to reach the promise left behind for you to enter Gods restIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise.” Alternate translation: “lest while what God has promised about entering into his rest remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
378HEB41gg3vfigs-explicitεἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ1Here and throughout this chapter, **rest** could refer to: (1) the state of “resting.” Alternate translation: “to participate in the way that God rests” or “to rest with him” (2) the place where people rest, particularly the land that God promised to give to his people. Alternate translation: “to enter into Gods resting place” or “to enter into the land of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
379HEB41ev85figs-abstractnounsτὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ1to enter Gods restIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **rest**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rest.” Make sure that your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note for what **rest** means. Alternate translation: “the way that God rests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
380HEB41hxlnδοκῇ…ὑστερηκέναι1Here, **seem to have failed** could indicate that: (1) a person is showing the outward signs of having **failed**. Alternate translation: “look like you have failed {to attain it}” (2) someone might think that he or she has **failed**. Alternate translation: “might think that you have failed {to attain it}” (3) God considers them **to have failed**. Alternate translation: “might be judged to have failed {to attain it}”
381HEB42ioq6grammar-connect-words-phrasesγάρ1Here, **For** introduces a further explanation of why we should “be afraid” ([4:1](../04/01.md)). The authors point is that **they** received the promise of rest, but they did not receive rest because they disobeyed. Since **we** are in the same situation and have also received the promise of rest, we need to “be afraid” that what happened to **them** will happen to **us**. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “That is especially true because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
382HEB42m74hfigs-activepassiveκαὶ…ἐσμεν εὐηγγελισμένοι καθάπερ κἀκεῖνοι1For we were told the good news just as they wereIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those to whom the **good news** is **proclaimed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “proclaiming.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “we also listened to the good news just as they did” or “someone proclaimed the good news to us also just as to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
383HEB42zc7kfigs-ellipsisκαθάπερ κἀκεῖνοι1This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “just they also had good news proclaimed to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
384HEB42znk9writing-pronounsκἀκεῖνοι…ἐκείνους1as they wereHere, **them** refers to the Israelites whom God led out of Egypt and who died in the wilderness without entering the rest (see [3:1619](../03/16.md)). If your readers would not know to whom **them** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “to the Israelite ancestors also … them” or “to that generation also … them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
385HEB42qtgcfigs-possessionὁ λόγος τῆς ἀκοῆς1Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **message** that someone, in this case the Israelite ancestors, “heard.” If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the message that they heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
386HEB42zza4grammar-connect-logic-resultμὴ συνκεκερασμένους1But that message did not benefit those who did not unite in faith with those who obeyedHere, **not having been mixed** introduces the reason why **the message** did not **benefit them**. If your readers not infer this relationship, you could express it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it had not been mixed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
387HEB42vexitranslate-unknownμὴ συνκεκερασμένους τῇ πίστει τοῖς ἀκούσασιν1Here, **not having been joined** refers back to **them**, who are not **joined** with **those who heard** as part of the group of those who believe. In this construction, **faith** can refer to: (1) what those who are **joined** have in common. Alternate translation: “not having been joined as people with faith to those who heard {it}” (2) what does the “joining.” Alternate translation: “not having been joined by faith to those who heard {it}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
388HEB42fzjjtranslate-textvariantsμὴ συνκεκερασμένους τῇ πίστει τοῖς ἀκούσασιν1Most early manuscripts make **not having been joined** refer back to **them**. However, a few early manuscripts make **not having been joined** refer back to **the message**. In this case, the clause would refer to how **those who heard** the message did not join **faith** to it when they heard it. In other words, they did not believe what they heard. However, the option that the ULT follows has the most support, so it is best to make **not having been joined** refer back to **them**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
389HEB42zwpffigs-activepassiveμὴ συνκεκερασμένους1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **joined** rather than focusing on the person doing the “joining.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” or they themselves did it. Alternate translation: “not having joined themselves” or “God not having joined them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
390HEB42uinqfigs-abstractnounsτῇ πίστει1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “in trusting it” or “in believing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
391HEB43n6dwgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, **For** introduces how one does “benefit” from hearing the “good news” ([4:2](../04/02.md)). It is those who “believe” who are able to **enter into rest**. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
392HEB43w6t4figs-explicitεἰσερχόμεθα…εἰς κατάπαυσιν, οἱ πιστεύσαντες1we who have believed enter that restHere, **rest** could refer to: (1) the state of “resting.” Alternate translation: “we who have believed participate in the way that God rests” or “we who have believed rest” (2) the place where people rest, particularly the land that God promised to give to his people. Alternate translation: “we who have believed enter into the resting place” or “we who have believed enter into the land of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
393HEB43egfofigs-explicitκαθὼς εἴρηκεν1Here, **just as** indicates that the quotation will support the claim that **we who have believed enter into rest**. However, the quotation is a negative statement about how the Israelite ancestors will not **enter into rest**. The quotation could support the claim by: (1) proving the opposite point. Since the Israelite ancestors did not enter because they did not believe (see [3:19](../03/19.md)), that means that those who believe can enter. Alternate translation: “which you know because he said this about those who did not believe:” (2) proving that the **rest** is still available. In other words, because the Israelite ancestors did not **enter**, someone still can **enter**. Alternate translation: “which you can tell is still available because he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
394HEB43x2kqwriting-quotationsκαθὼς εἴρηκεν1just as he saidHere the author uses **just as he said** to requote a part of the quotation that he introduced earlier (see especially [3:11](../03/11.md)). If your readers would misunderstand that the author is requoting the previous quotation to focus on a specific portion of it, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that has already been quoted. Alternate translation: “just as he said in what I already quoted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
395HEB43lnczwriting-pronounsεἴρηκεν1Here, **he** could refer back to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “Gods Spirit said” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
396HEB43v4q4figs-quotationsεἴρηκεν, ὡς ὤμοσα ἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “he said, as he swore in his wrath, that they would never enter into his rest,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
397HEB43qfs8ὡς ὤμοσα ἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου1As I swore in my wrathSince the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [3:11](../03/11.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in that verse.
398HEB43k1ldfigs-explicitκαίτοι τῶν ἔργων1They will never enter my restHere, **although** introduces something that is unexpected. God swore that the Israelite ancestors would not **enter into my rest**, but (unexpectedly) that rest has been available since **{the} foundation of {the} world**, since Gods **works were finished** then. The authors point is that Gods oath about how the Israelite ancestors would never **enter** does not mean that the **rest** is not available or not yet available. Instead, the **rest** has been available since God created everything. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could expression the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “but despite that, {his} works” or “although the rest is available even now, for {his} works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
399HEB43x8zvfigs-activepassiveτῶν ἔργων…γενηθέντων1his works were finishedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **works** that **were finished** rather than focusing on the person doing the “finishing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God finished his works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
400HEB43af1lfigs-abstractnounsτῶν ἔργων…γενηθέντων1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “work” or “do.” Alternate translation: “the things that he did were finished” or “what he worked was finished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
401HEB43ypr4figs-abstractnounsἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **foundation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “establish” or “build.” Alternate translation: “from when he established the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
402HEB43vym3figs-metaphorἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου1from the foundation of the worldThe author speaks of how God created the **world** as if he set the **world** on a **foundation** or solid base. In the authors culture, this was a common way to refer to how God created everything. If your readers would misunderstand **{the} foundation of {the} world**, you could use a phrase that refers to how God created everything. Alternate translation: “from the beginning of the world” or “from the time when the world was created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
403HEB44q2n3grammar-connect-words-phrasesγάρ1Here, **For** introduces the proof for what the author has claimed about how Gods “works were finished from the foundation of the world” (). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces proof or support. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
404HEB44fzgjwriting-pronounsεἴρηκεν…που1Here, just as in [4:3](../04/03.md), **he** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the Psalms quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “Gods Spirit has somewhere spoken” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God has somewhere spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
405HEB44hsujwriting-quotationsεἴρηκεν…που περὶ τῆς ἑβδόμης οὕτως1Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that someone (probably the Holy Spirit) has spoken. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md). This passage tells the story of how God created everything in six days and then rested on the seventh day. Since the author introduces the quotation as words that someone has spoken, you should do the same. The word **somewhere** shows that the words come from Scripture without stating exactly where. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “in another place he has said thus about the seventh {day}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
406HEB44a7ijfigs-quotationsπερὶ τῆς ἑβδόμης…καὶ κατέπαυσεν ὁ Θεὸς ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ἑβδόμῃ ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ;1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “about the seventh {day} that God rested on that day from all his works.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
407HEB44hbm5translate-ordinalτῆς ἑβδόμης…τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ἑβδόμῃ1the seventh dayIf your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “{day} seven … day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
408HEB44jojqfigs-abstractnounsἀπὸ πάντων τῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “work” or “do.” Alternate translation: “from the things that he was doing” or “from what he was working” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
409HEB44ghxkfigs-explicitπάντων τῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ1Here, **all his works** refers specifically to the **works** of creation. The quotation does not mean that God stopped doing everything. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “all his works of creating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
410HEB45zq16writing-quotationsκαὶ ἐν τούτῳ πάλιν1it still remains that some will enter his restHere the author uses **And again in this {passage}** to requote a part of the quotation that he introduced earlier (see especially [3:11](../03/11.md); [4:3](../04/03.md)). The phrase **this {passage}** refers to the quotation from Psalm 95, which is the primary passage that the author is discussing. If your readers would misunderstand that the author is requoting the previous quotation to focus on a specific portion of it, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that has already been quoted. Alternate translation: “And when we consider again the passage we are discussing, it says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
411HEB45zwlkfigs-quotationsἐν τούτῳ…εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “in this {passage} it says that they will never enter into his rest.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
412HEB45qfjrεἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου1Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [3:11](../03/11.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in that verse.
413HEB46hptvgrammar-connect-logic-resultοὖν1Here, **Therefore** introduces the conclusion to what the author has argued in [4:25](../04/02.md). Use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of conclusion. Alternate translation: “Because of all that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
414HEB46twwvfigs-idiomἀπολείπεται τινὰς εἰσελθεῖν1When something **remains**, people can still access or make use of it. In other words, the ability to **enter** is still valid or available. If your readers would misunderstand **it remains**, you could express the idea in a more natural way. See how you translated the similar words in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “there is still the possibility of entering” or “God still allows some to enter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
415HEB46f3pzfigs-explicitεἰσελθεῖν εἰς αὐτήν…οὐκ εἰσῆλθον1Here, just as in [4:1](../04/01.md), the rest which people **enter** could refer to: (1) the state of “resting.” Alternate translation: “to participate in it … did not participate” or “to rest with God … did not rest with God” (2) the place where people rest, particularly the land that God promised to give to his people. Alternate translation: “to enter into the place … did not enter it” or “to enter into the land … did not enter it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
416HEB46uyfrfigs-explicitοἱ πρότερον εὐαγγελισθέντες1Here, those who **had the good news proclaimed to them** are the same people the author mentions as “them” in [4:2](../04/02.md): the Israelite ancestors whom God led out of Egypt and who did not enter the promised land. If your readers would misunderstand who these people are, you could make the reference explicit. Alternate translation: “the Israelite ancestors who previously had the gospel proclaimed to them” or “the people of that generation who previously had the gospel proclaimed to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
417HEB46z0pzfigs-abstractnounsοὐκ εἰσῆλθον δι’ ἀπείθειαν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **disobedience**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “disobey” or an adjective such as “disobedient.” Alternate translation: “did not enter, because they disobeyed” or “did not enter, because they were disobedient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
418HEB47s964writing-pronounsπάλιν…ὁρίζει1Here, just as in [4:34](../04/03.md), **he** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the Psalms quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “Gods Spirit again sets” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God again sets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
419HEB47w90dπάλιν1Here, **again** indicates that the Holy Spirit had already “set” a **day** and now does it for a second time. The first time was when God promised the “rest” to the Israelite ancestors. The second time (**again**) was when the Spirit spoke the quote from Psalm 95 **through David**. If your readers would misunderstand **again**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to doing something “once more” or “for a second time.” Alternate translation: “for a second time”
420HEB47z7bjfigs-idiomσήμερον1Here the author speaks about a time that we call **Today**. We call every day **Today**, so this phrase means that the rest is available right now. However, since the author uses **Today** because the author of the quotation uses it, make sure that you use the same words that you used to translate **Today** in [3:7](../03/07.md). Alternate translation: “calling it This day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
421HEB47y2tmἐν Δαυεὶδ λέγων1General Information:The Holy Spirit calls the **certain day** **“Today”** when he was **speaking through David**. The author knows that **David** wrote the Psalm that he is quoting, but he also knows that **David** was inspired by the Holy Spirit. Use a form in your language that refers to how someone speaks through or by means of someone else. Alternate translation: “using David to speak”
422HEB47gkqrfigs-explicitμετὰ τοσοῦτον χρόνον1Here the author notes that David wrote the Psalm a long time after what the Psalm narrates about the Israelite ancestors occurred. David still applies the Psalm to his audience, however. If your readers would misunderstand **after so much time**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a long period of time. Alternate translation: “after so many years” or “many years later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
423HEB47lsp6writing-quotationsκαθὼς προείρηται1do not harden your heartsHere the author uses **just as it has already been said** to requote a part of the quotation that he introduced earlier (see especially [3:7b8a](../03/07.md); [3:15](../03/15.md)). If your readers would misunderstand that the author is requoting the previous quotation to focus on a specific portion of it, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that has already been quoted. Alternate translation: “just as we read in the passage we are discussing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
424HEB47yojdfigs-activepassiveπροείρηται1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the words that have **been said** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that he himself did it. Alternate translation: “I have already said” or “I have already quoted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
425HEB47bp6ufigs-quotationsπροείρηται, σήμερον ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε, μὴ σκληρύνητε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν1if you hear his voiceIf you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “it has already been said that today, if you hear his voice, you should not harden your hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
426HEB47pktzσήμερον ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε, μὴ σκληρύνητε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν1Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [3:7b8a](../03/07.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in those verses.
427HEB48s78rgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, **For** introduces further explanation about the day called “Today.” If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces explanation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
428HEB48st4ltranslate-namesἸησοῦς1**Joshua** is the name of a man. God chose him to lead the Israelites when they entered the land that God had promised to give them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
429HEB48fp52grammar-connect-condition-contraryεἰ…αὐτοὺς Ἰησοῦς κατέπαυσεν1Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **Joshua** did not give the Israelite ancestors the kind of **rest** he is discussing. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by showing that it would contradict what is true: the Holy Spirit did actually speak **about another day**, as the previous verse shows. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if Joshua had actually given them rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
430HEB48mdq9figs-metaphorαὐτοὺς Ἰησοῦς κατέπαυσεν1if Joshua had given them restHere the author speaks as if **Joshua** were the one who could have “given” **rest** to the Israelite ancestors. This expression means that what Joshua did could have enabled the Israelite ancestors to receive **rest** from God. If your readers would misunderstand that the **rest** comes from God, who worked through **Joshua**, you could express the idea more naturally. Alternate translation: “God had used Joshua to give them rest” or “Joshua had helped them rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
431HEB48ksknfigs-explicitαὐτοὺς…κατέπαυσεν1See how you translated **rest** in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “enabled them to rest with God” or “enabled them to enter into Gods resting place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
432HEB48o9qbfigs-abstractnounsαὐτοὺς…κατέπαυσεν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **rest**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rest.” Make sure that your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note for what **rest** means. Alternate translation: “helped them rest the way that God rests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
433HEB48wl6lwriting-pronounsοὐκ ἂν…ἐλάλει1Here, just as in [4:7](../04/07.md), **he** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the Psalms quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “Gods Spirit would not have spoken” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God would not have spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
434HEB48gnxjἡμέρας1Here the author refers to a **day** because the quotation he is discussing refers to “today.” If possible, use a word or phrase here that is related to how you translated “today” in the quotation (see [4:7](../04/07.md)). The author does not mean that there is only one period of 24 hours in which people can “enter the rest.” If your readers would misunderstand **day**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a specific point in time. Alternate translation: “time” or “moment in time”
435HEB48jjkrfigs-explicitμετὰ ταῦτα1Here, **these {things}** refers to what happened when **Joshua** was leading the Israelite ancestors. He guided them into the land that God had promised to give them, and he led them as they fought their enemies and settled down in that land. The authors point is that, since David speaks about entering the **rest** much later than this, the events related to **Joshua** must not count as getting **rest**. If your readers would misunderstand what **these {things}** refer to, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “after Joshua led the people into the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
436HEB49ob3pgrammar-connect-logic-resultἄρα1Here, **Therefore** introduces the conclusion to the argument in [4:38](../04/03.md). If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion. Alternate translation: “So then” or “In conclusion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
437HEB49vhx9figs-idiomἀπολείπεται σαββατισμὸς1there is still a Sabbath rest reserved for Gods peopleWhen something **remains**, people can still access or make use of it. In other words, the **Sabbath rest** is still valid or available. If your readers would misunderstand **there remains**, you could express the idea in a more natural way. See how you translated the similar words in [4:1](../04/01.md), [6](../04/06.md). Alternate translation: “there is still a Sabbath rest” or “God still provides a Sabbath rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
438HEB49qe6xtranslate-unknownσαββατισμὸς1a Sabbath restHere, the word translated **a Sabbath rest** is a very rare word that is closely related to the word for **Sabbath**, which refers to the seventh day of the week on which the Israelites rested, as God commanded them to do. The **Sabbath rest** could refer to: (1) keeping the **Sabbath** by “resting.” Alternate translation: “rest as on the Sabbath day” (2) celebrating the special day that is the **Sabbath**. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath celebration” or “a celebration as on the day of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
439HEB410nyixgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, **For** introduces further explanation of **rest**. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word that introduces an explanation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
440HEB410i6ehfigs-pastforfutureὁ…εἰσελθὼν…καὶ αὐτὸς κατέπαυσεν1Here the author uses the past tense to speak about something that is true in general. Use whatever tense you would naturally use in your language to speak about something that is generally true. Alternate translation: “the one who will enter … will himself also rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
441HEB410ej9yfigs-explicitὁ…εἰσελθὼν εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ1he who enters into Gods restSee how you translated “entering the rest” in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “the one who rests with God” or “the one who enters into Gods resting place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
442HEB410dg2dwriting-pronounsαὐτοῦ1Here, **his** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand **his**, you could make to whom it refers explicit. Alternate translation: “Gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
443HEB410xmgnfigs-gendernotationsαὐτὸς…αὐτοῦ1Although **himself** and **his** are masculine, they refer to anyone, both male and female. If your readers would misunderstand **himself** and **his**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “himself or herself … his or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
444HEB410rdm0figs-rpronounsαὐτὸς1Here, the word translated **himself** emphasizes the comparison between **the one who has entered** and **God**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize this comparison in your language. Alternate translation: “in fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
445HEB410r3jyfigs-abstractnounsτῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ…τῶν ἰδίων1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “work” or “do.” Alternate translation: “the things he did … the things he did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
446HEB410sj1tfigs-explicitὥσπερ ἀπὸ τῶν ἰδίων ὁ Θεός1Here the author refers back to what he already said in [4:4](../04/04.md) about how God “rested on the seventh day” after he created everything. If your readers would misunderstand how God rested from his **works**, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as God rested after he created the world” or “just as God did from his own works on the seventh day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
447HEB411fem2grammar-connect-logic-resultοὖν1Here, **Therefore** introduces an exhortation that is based on what the author has argued in [3:74:10](../03/07.md). If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces how readers should respond to what the author has argued. Alternate translation: “So then” or “In light of what I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
448HEB411vyo4translate-unknownσπουδάσωμεν1Here, **let us be eager** refers to focusing on and working hard to accomplish some specific goal. If your readers would misunderstand **let us be eager**, you could use a word or phrase that expresses this idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “let us strive” or “let us be diligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
449HEB411bmg5figs-explicitεἰσελθεῖν εἰς ἐκείνην τὴν κατάπαυσιν1let us be eager to enter that restSee how you translated “entering the rest” in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “to rest with God” or “to enter into Gods resting place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
450HEB411rtj7figs-metaphorἐν…πέσῃ1will fall into the kind of disobedience that they didHere the author speaks as if **disobedience** were a hole that a person could physically **fall into**. This “falling into” the hole of **disobedience** keeps a person from reaching their goal or arriving at their destination. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “might fail by following” or “might follow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
451HEB411eosofigs-possessionτῷ αὐτῷ…ὑποδείγματι…τῆς ἀπειθείας1Here the author uses the possessive form to show that the **example** is the **disobedience**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. The idea is that the Israelite ancestors provided the **example** of **disobedience** that we should not follow. Alternate translation: “the same thing, which is disobedience” or “disobedience that is like that of the Israelite ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
452HEB411uzndfigs-abstractnounsτῷ αὐτῷ…ὑποδείγματι…τῆς ἀπειθείας1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **disobedience**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “disobey.” Alternate translation: “disobeying in the same way that they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
453HEB412iwtkgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, **For** introduces a further reason for why we need to “be eager” ([4:11](../04/11.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the basis for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “We should do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
454HEB412h5d2figs-metonymyὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ1the word of God is livingHere, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If your readers would misunderstand **word**, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of God” or “what God says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
455HEB412hnc2figs-possessionὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here the author uses a possessive to describe a **word** that: (1) **God** speaks. Alternate translation: “the word that God speaks” (2) is **God**. Alternate translation: “the divine Word” or “God the Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
456HEB412j9qyfigs-personificationζῶν…καὶ ἐνεργὴς…διϊκνούμενος…καὶ κριτικὸς1living and activeIn these phrases, the author describes the **word of God** as if it were a person that was **living and active** and that could “pierce” and **judge** other people. He speaks in this way to show that God accomplishes these things through his **word**, that is, when he speaks. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea by making God the subject of these actions or by using analogy form. Alternate translation: “is from the living and active God … God uses it to pierce … God uses it to judge” or “is like a living and active person … piercing like a person pierces … and able, like a person, to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
457HEB412g4tcfigs-metaphorτομώτερος, ὑπὲρ πᾶσαν μάχαιραν δίστομον, καὶ διϊκνούμενος ἄχρι μερισμοῦ1sharper than any two-edged swordHere the author compares the **word of God** to a **sword** that has two edges. Gods word is even **sharper** than that kind of sword, which means it is even better at **piercing**. The author uses this figure of speech to show how good the **word of God** is at discerning and judging humans. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “is like a very sharp two-edged sword that pierces to the dividing” or “able to distinguish what is wrong from what is right, including even the dividing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
458HEB412lv6ytranslate-unknownμάχαιραν δίστομον1two-edged swordA **two-edged sword** describes a weapon or tool with two sharp edges. This kind of **sword** can “pierce” something better than a sword with only one sharp edge can. If your readers would misunderstand **two-edged sword**, you could use a comparable term or a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “blade with two sharp edges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
459HEB412e7kvtranslate-unknownκαὶ διϊκνούμενος ἄχρι μερισμοῦ ψυχῆς καὶ πνεύματος, ἁρμῶν τε καὶ μυελῶν1It pierces even to the dividing of soul and spirit, of joints and marrowHere the author describes how the **word**, like a **sword**, can “pierce” **to the dividing** of things. These words refer to how a **sword** can cut something into two pieces. The author refers to things that are hard to divide: **joints** and **marrow** are difficult to separate, as are **soul** and **spirit**. The point is that the **word** can separate things that are hard to separate, just like a very sharp **sword** can. If your readers would misunderstand these words, you could use words or phrases that refer to cutting things into pieces. Alternate translation: “and slicing apart soul and spirit, joints and marrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
460HEB412m6f2translate-unknownψυχῆς καὶ πνεύματος1soul and spiritHere, **soul** and **spirit** refer to two distinguishable aspects of the nonphysical part of a human. It is possible that **soul** refers primarily to life and personality, while **spirit** refers to how people relate to others and express themselves. However, the author is not primarily interested in what parts of the person these two words refer to. Rather, he is focused on how **soul** and **spirit** always go together, and it is difficult to “divide” them. If your readers would misunderstand **soul** and **spirit**, you could use words that refer to closely related aspects of the nonphysical parts of a person. Alternate translation: “of mind and spirit” or “of personality and mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
461HEB412sc3mtranslate-unknownἁρμῶν τε καὶ μυελῶν1joints and marrowThe **joints** are the places where bones connect. The **marrow** is the center part of bones. The author is primarily interested in how the **joints** and the **marrow** are closely connected together, and it requires cutting a bone into pieces to separate them from each other. If your readers would misunderstand **joints and marrow**, you could refer to body parts that are very difficult to separate. Alternate translation: “of both tendons and muscles” or “of both ligaments and bones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
462HEB412n6n5figs-abstractnounsἐνθυμήσεων καὶ ἐννοιῶν καρδίας1is able to discernIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **thoughts** and **intentions**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “think” and “plan.” Alternate translation: “what the heart ponders and devises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
463HEB412xdu4figs-metonymyκαρδίας1the thoughts and intentions of the heartIn the authors culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and plan. If your readers would misunderstand **heart**, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “of the mind” or “that people think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
464HEB412r6rnfigs-genericnounκαρδίας1Here Paul is speaking of “hearts” in general, not of one particular **heart**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a form that refers to “hearts” in general. Alternate translation: “of hearts” or “of human hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
465HEB413kyokwriting-pronounsαὐτοῦ…αὐτοῦ, πρὸς ὃν1Here, **him** and **whom** could refer to: (1) God, who spoke the “word” that is referred to in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “God … of him to whom” (2) the “word” that is referred to in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this word … of it to which” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
466HEB413nx6nfigs-activepassiveοὐκ ἔστιν κτίσις ἀφανὴς1Nothing created is hidden before GodIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus what is **hidden** rather than focusing what does the “hiding.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague subject or have the “creature” trying to hide itself. Alternate translation: “no creature can hide” or “no creature can hide itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
467HEB413f3h1figs-metaphorπάντα…γυμνὰ καὶ τετραχηλισμένα1everything is bare and openHere the author speaks about **all {things}** as if they were a naked person whose body was **bare** for all to see. He also speaks of **all {things}** as if someone had pulled another persons head back to “lay open” his or her neck. Both of these expressions indicate that God sees and knows everything about **all {things}**. If your readers would misunderstand either of these expressions, you could use comparable metaphors or express the ideas nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “all {things} {are} visible and revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
468HEB413yk64figs-doubletγυμνὰ καὶ τετραχηλισμένα1bare and openThese two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize that God sees and knows everything. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these ideas, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “are visible” or “are revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
469HEB413sltwfigs-activepassiveτετραχηλισμένα1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since the author is describing a characteristic of **all {things}**, avoid stating a subject here. It may be best to translate **laid open** with an adjective that has a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “open” or “visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
470HEB413i9hhfigs-metonymyτοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς αὐτοῦ1to the eyes of the one to whom we must give accountHere, **eyes** figuratively refers to seeing or knowing. If your readers would misunderstand **eyes**, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “to the sight of him” or “for him to know, who is the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
471HEB413k8k0figs-idiomπρὸς ὃν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος1This phrase could mean: (1) that God will hold us responsible for what we have done. The **word** here would refer to the “account” of our actions that we will need to make to God. Alternate translation: “to whom we must give account” (2) that God is one whom the author is speaking about to his audience. The **word** here would refer to the “words” that the author is speaking to his audience. Alternate translation: “about whom we are speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
472HEB414iv8xgrammar-connect-logic-resultοὖν1Here, **Therefore** refers back to what the author already said about how Jesus is a **high priest** (see [2:173:1](../02/17.md)). It may refer especially to [3:1](../03/01.md), where the author stated that Jesus is “the high priest of our confession.” So, **Therefore** introduces how the author wants his audience to act, given that Jesus is a **great high priest**. If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that resumes a previous topic, or you could use a word or phrase that introduces the result or consequence of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of all that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
473HEB414spfugrammar-connect-logic-resultἔχοντες1Here, **having** introduces a reason for the exhortation to **firmly hold**. If your readers would misunderstand this relationship, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “since we have” or “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
474HEB414a51pfigs-goδιεληλυθότα τοὺς οὐρανούς1who has passed through the heavensHere, **passed through** refers to travel or movement within a specific area, here **the heavens**. It does not necessarily mean that Jesus traveled through and then left **the heavens**. Use a word that you would use for traveling in a specific direction through an area. Alternate translation: “who has gone through the heavens” or “who has traveled through the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
475HEB414ejwyfigs-explicitτοὺς οὐρανούς1Many people in the authors culture believed that the space that they called “heaven” contained multiple layers or spheres of individual **heavens**. Paul speaks this way in [2 Corinthians 12:2](../../2co/12/02.md). Here, the author uses this language without clarifying how many **heavens** there are. The main point is that Jesus **passed through** these **heavens** to where God dwells. Often, this place where God dwells is in the highest of the **heavens**. Since the author does not include details about the **heavens**, translate **heavens** with a word or phrase that refers to all of heavenly space, including the idea of multiple **heavens** if possible. Alternate translation: “the heavenly realm” or “the heavenly spaces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
476HEB414ph6zguidelines-sonofgodprinciplesτὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ1Son of God**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. See how you translated **Son** in [1:2](../01/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
477HEB414vt4vfigs-metaphorκρατῶμεν τῆς ὁμολογίας1let us firmly hold to our beliefsHere, **firmly hold** refers to continuing to consistently believe or trust something, particularly something that one has been told. If your readers would misunderstand **firmly hold**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to continuing to believe or trust. Alternate translation: “let us tightly grasp {our} confession” or “let us continue to trust {our} confession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
478HEB414xfmwfigs-abstractnounsτῆς ὁμολογίας1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confession**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “confess” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “to what we confess” or “to what we believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
479HEB415z0bqgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, **For** introduces further explanation of how Jesus is a high priest. This information supports the authors exhortation to “firmly hold” to the “confession” (see [4:15](../04/15.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word that introduces support for an exhortation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “We should do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
480HEB415i2fwfigs-doublenegativesοὐ…ἔχομεν ἀρχιερέα μὴ δυνάμενον συνπαθῆσαι ταῖς ἀσθενείαις ἡμῶν, πεπειρασμένον δὲ1we do not have a high priest who cannot feel sympathy … Instead, we haveHere the author uses two negative words to emphasize how much Jesus is able to **sympathize** with us as **high priest**. If your readers would misunderstand the two negatives, and if it would not be emphatic in your language, you could express the idea with a positive statement and emphasize it in another way. If you do this, you will need to translate **but** as a connection instead of a contrast. Alternate translation: “we indeed have a high priest who is able to sympathize with our weaknesses, {one} having been tempted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
481HEB415zuprfigs-abstractnounsταῖς ἀσθενείαις ἡμῶν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **weaknesses**, you could express the idea by using a an adjective such as “weak.” Alternate translation: “with the ways that we are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
482HEB415m56mfigs-ellipsisπεπειρασμένον δὲ1This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we have one who has been tempted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
483HEB415d26hfigs-activepassiveπεπειρασμένον1who has in all ways been tempted as we areIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on Jesus, who was **tempted** rather than focusing on the person or thing doing the “tempting.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject, since many things can “tempt.” Alternate translation: “one whom things tempted” or “one having experienced temptation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
484HEB415s5gvfigs-idiomκατὰ πάντα καθ’ ὁμοιότητα1Both phrases that use **according to** give more information about how Jesus was **tempted**. The first, **according to all {things}**, shows that Jesus experienced many different kinds of temptations. The second, **according to {our} likeness**, shows that Jesus experienced these temptations in the same ways that all other humans do. If your readers would misunderstand these two phrases, you could express them more naturally in your language. Alternate translation: “in every way, just like we are tempted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
485HEB415jp4nfigs-abstractnounsὁμοιότητα1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **likeness**, you could express the idea by using a word such as “like” or “similar.” Alternate translation: “what we are like” or “the ways that all humans are similar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
486HEB415fve3χωρὶς ἁμαρτίας1he is without sinAlternate translation: “but who did not sin”
487HEB416ujt6grammar-connect-logic-resultπροσερχώμεθα οὖν1Here, **then** introduces an exhortation that is based [4:1415](../04/14.md). If your readers would misunderstand **then**, you could use a word or phrase that does introduce an exhortation. Alternate translation: “Therefore, let us approach” or “Because of that, let us approach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
488HEB416sy6yfigs-goπροσερχώμεθα οὖν μετὰ παρρησίας τῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος1Here, **approach** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author wants believers to **approach** Gods **throne** in heaven. This means that they enter into Gods presence. It does not mean that they enter into heaven to be right next to the **throne**. If your readers would misunderstand **approach**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someones presence. Alternate translation: “Let us then with confidence go before the throne of grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
489HEB416h49rfigs-abstractnounsμετὰ παρρησίας1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “boldly” or “confidently.” Alternate translation: “confidently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
490HEB416aj1pfigs-metonymyτῷ θρόνῳ1to the throne of graceHere, **throne** refers figuratively to the one sitting on the **throne**: God. If your readers would misunderstand **throne**, you could clarify that it refers to God on his **throne**. Alternate translation: “to God on his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
491HEB416s6vpfigs-possessionτῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος1Here the author uses the possessive form to describe how **grace** comes from God on the **throne**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “to throne from which grace comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
492HEB416e6nbfigs-abstractnounsτῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grace**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “gracious” or an adverb such as “graciously.” Alternate translation: “to the gracious throne” or “to throne where God rules graciously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
493HEB416py6dfigs-abstractnounsλάβωμεν ἔλεος, καὶ χάριν εὕρωμεν, εἰς εὔκαιρον βοήθειαν1we may receive mercy and find grace to help in time of needIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **mercy**, **grace**, and **help**, you could express the idea by using verbs or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “God may be merciful and gracious to us to help us when we need it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
494HEB416x3hvfigs-doubletλάβωμεν ἔλεος, καὶ χάριν εὕρωμεν1The two phrases **receive mercy** and **find grace** mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize how God will act kindly and lovingly toward those who believe in Jesus. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “we may receive grace” or “we may receive favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
495HEB416f149figs-idiomχάριν εὕρωμεν1Here, **find grace** refers to receiving **grace** from someone. If your readers would misunderstand **find grace**, you could express the idea in a natural way in your language. Alternate translation: “grace” or “experience grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
496HEB416n654translate-unknownεὔκαιρον βοήθειαν1Here, **timely** refers to something that happens at just the right time. Here, it means that the **help** happens just when someone needs that **help**. If your readers would misunderstand **timely**, you could use a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “help at the right time” or “well-timed help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
497HEB5introb67j0# Hebrews 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n5. The Son as high priest (5:110:18)\n * Teaching: The Son becomes high priest (5:110)\n * Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:116:12)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 5:5-6.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### High priest\n\nOnly a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Milk and solid food\n\nThe writer speaks of Christians who are only able to understand simple things about Jesus as if they were babies, who drink only milk and cannot eat solid food. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n
498HEB51dn18grammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Connecting Statement:Here, **For** indicates that the author is going to explain more about high priests and about how Jesus is a high priest. It also signals that the author is beginning a new section. Use a word or phrase that indicates that a new section is beginning, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
499HEB51whq1figs-activepassiveλαμβανόμενος1chosen from among peopleIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **taken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “taking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God taking him” or “whom God takes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
500HEB51u4gdfigs-gendernotationsἐξ ἀνθρώπων…ὑπὲρ ἀνθρώπων1Although **men** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all the people in a group, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “from among humans on the behalf of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
501HEB51ndz7figs-activepassiveκαθίσταται1is appointedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **appointed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “appointing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God appointed” or “is one whom God appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
502HEB51mzd9translate-unknownτὰ πρὸς τὸν Θεόν1to act on the behalf of peopleHere **{in} the {things} related to God** identifies **every high priest** as a person who serves God and who acts as a priest in Gods presence. If your readers would misunderstand **{in} the {things} related to God**, you could use a word or phrase that makes this clear. See how you translated the similar phrase in [2:17](../02/17.md). Alternate translation: “before God” or “to be in Gods presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
503HEB51oe4pfigs-gendernotationsπροσφέρῃ1Here, **he** refers to the **high priest** that the author is discussing. In Israelite and Jewish culture, only men could be high priests, so **he** does refer to a man. However, the author is not emphasizing that the **high priest** is male, so you can use a non-gendered word if it is clearer. Alternate translation: “this person may offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
504HEB51efenfigs-doubletδῶρά καὶ θυσίας1Here, **gifts** and **sacrifices** function together to refer to anything that an Israelite would have offered to God. It is probable that **sacrifices** refers to animals that would be killed and offered to God, while **gifts** identifies anything else that a person would give to God. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to refer to what an Israelite would offer to God. Alternate translation: “sacrifices” or “things presented to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
505HEB51ip99figs-idiomὑπὲρ ἁμαρτιῶν1
506HEB52gt9jfigs-activepassiveπλανωμένοις1those … who have been deceivedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whom others have deceived” or “who believe what is false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
507HEB52f781πλανωμένοις1who have been deceivedAlternate translation: “who believe false things and so behave badly”
508HEB52ny8ufigs-metaphorπερίκειται ἀσθένειαν1is subject to weaknessThe high priests own **weakness** is spoken of as if it were another person who rules over him. Alternate translation: “is spiritually weak” or “is controlled by his weakness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
509HEB52ihs9ἀσθένειαν1weaknessthe desire to sin
510HEB53q5xifigs-activepassiveὀφείλει1he also is requiredIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God also requires him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
511HEB54c336figs-metaphorλαμβάνει τὴν τιμήν1takes this honorHere, **honor** is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could grasp in his hands. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
512HEB54n2e1figs-metonymyλαμβάνει τὴν τιμήν1takes this honorThe **honor** or praise and respect that people gave to the high priest stand for his task. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
513HEB54p6hcfigs-activepassiveκαλούμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, καθώσπερ καὶ Ἀαρών1he is called by God, just as Aaron wasIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God called him, just as he called Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
514HEB55c45nΥἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε1This quotation is from the Psalms in the Old Testament.
515HEB55pr3fὁ λαλήσας πρὸς αὐτόν1the one speaking to him saidAlternate translation: “God said to him”
516HEB55i694figs-parallelismΥἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε1You are my Son; today I have become your FatherThese two clauses mean essentially the same thing. See how you translated this in [Hebrews 1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
517HEB55mfa8guidelines-sonofgodprinciplesΥἱός1Son … Father**Son** is important title that describe the relationship between Jesus and God the Father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
518HEB56bce60General Information:This prophecy is from a Psalm of David.
519HEB56ds6vfigs-ellipsisκαὶ…λέγει1he also saysYou can state clearly to whom God is speaking. Alternate translation: “he also says to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
520HEB56k5uwἐν ἑτέρῳ1in another placeAlternate translation: “in another place in the scriptures”
521HEB56ede5κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ1after the manner of MelchizedekHere, **the order of Melchizedek** rules and practices that **Melchizedek** followed and the authority he had as a priest of God. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest”
522HEB57mv2cfigs-metonymyἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ1During the days of his fleshHere, **the days** stands for a period of time, and **flesh** stands for Jesus earthly life. Alternate translation: “while he lived on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
523HEB57iel9figs-doubletδεήσεις…καὶ ἱκετηρίας1prayers and requestsBoth **prayers** and **requests** mean basically the same thing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
524HEB57p6zmτὸν δυνάμενον σῴζειν αὐτὸν ἐκ θανάτου1the one able to save him from deathThis could mean: (1) God was **able to save** Christ so that he would not die. Alternate translation: “to save him from dying” (2) God was **able to save** Christ after Christs death by making him alive again. If possible, translate this in a way that allows both interpretations.
525HEB57e75afigs-activepassiveεἰσακουσθεὶς1he was heardIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God heard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
526HEB58mk8zguidelines-sonofgodprinciplesυἱός1a sonHere, **son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
527HEB59z2bv0Connecting Statement:In verse 11 the writer begins his third warning. He warns these believers that they are still not mature and encourages them to learn Gods word so they can understand right from wrong.
528HEB59i29cfigs-activepassiveτελειωθεὶς1He was made perfectIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God made him perfect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
529HEB59n5qtτελειωθεὶς1made perfectHere, **made perfect** means being made mature, able to honor God in all aspects of life.
530HEB59p9ugfigs-abstractnounsἐγένετο πᾶσιν τοῖς ὑπακούουσιν αὐτῷ αἴτιος σωτηρίας αἰωνίου1became, for everyone who obeys him, the cause of eternal salvationYou can state the abstract noun **salvation** as a verb. Alternate translation: “now he saves all who obey him and causes them to live forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
531HEB510b9sufigs-activepassiveπροσαγορευθεὶς ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ1He was designated by GodIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God designated him” or “God appointed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
532HEB510hd47κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ1after the manner of MelchizedekHere, **the order of Melchizedek** means that Christ as a priest has things in common with Melchizedek as a priest. Alternate translation: “to be the sort of high priest that Melchizedek was”
533HEB511cm78figs-exclusiveἡμῖν ὁ λόγος1We have much to sayHere, the plural pronoun **us** includes both the author and the people to whom he is writing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
534HEB511r2u2figs-metaphorνωθροὶ γεγόνατε ταῖς ἀκοαῖς1you have become dull in hearingThe ability to understand and obey is spoken of as if it were the ability to listen. And the ability to listen is spoken of as if it were a metal tool that becomes **dull** with use. Alternate translation: “you have trouble understanding it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
535HEB512lw1aτὰ στοιχεῖα τῆς ἀρχῆς1basic principlesHere, **principles** means a guideline or standard for making decisions. Alternate translation: “of the basic truths”
536HEB512wy2hfigs-metaphorγεγόνατε χρείαν ἔχοντες γάλακτος1You need milkTeaching about God that is easy to understand is spoken of as if it were **milk**, the only food that infants can take. Alternate translation: “you have become like babies and can drink only milk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
537HEB512yk1qfigs-metaphorγάλακτος, οὐ στερεᾶς τροφῆς1milk, not solid foodTeaching about God that is difficult to understand is spoken of as if it were **solid food**, suitable for adults. Alternate translation: “of milk instead of solid food that adults can eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
538HEB513nhx3figs-metonymyμετέχων γάλακτος1takes milkHere, **takes** stands for “drinks.” Alternate translation: “who drinks milk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
539HEB513vl7kfigs-metaphorνήπιος γάρ ἐστιν1because he is still a little childSpiritual maturity is compared with the kind of food that a growing **child** eats. Solid food is not for a tiny baby, and that is a figure describing a young Christian who only learns simple truths; but later, more solid food is given to the little child, just as when a person matures he can learn about matters that are more difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
540HEB514e3yhfigs-metonymyτῶν διὰ τὴν ἕξιν τὰ αἰσθητήρια γεγυμνασμένα, ἐχόντων πρὸς διάκρισιν, καλοῦ τε καὶ κακοῦ1who because of their maturity have their understanding trained for distinguishing good from evilPeople trained to understand something are spoken of as if their ability to understand had been **trained**. Alternate translation: “who are mature and can distinguish between good and evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
541HEB6intronz5i0# Hebrews 6 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Abrahamic Covenant<br><br>In the covenant that God made with Abraham, God promised to make Abrahams descendants into a great nation. He also promised to protect Abrahams descendants and to give them land of their own. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
542HEB61f1nk0Connecting Statement:The writer continues with what immature Hebrew believers need to do to become mature Christians. He reminds them of the foundational teachings.
543HEB61i4xrfigs-metaphorἀφέντες τὸν τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ Χριστοῦ λόγον, ἐπὶ τὴν τελειότητα φερώμεθα1let us leave the beginning of the message of Christ and move forward to maturityThis speaks about the basic teachings as if they were the beginning of a journey and the mature teachings as if they were the end of a journey. Alternate translation: “let us stop only discussing what we first learned and start understanding more mature teachings as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
544HEB61thw8figs-metaphorμὴ πάλιν θεμέλιον καταβαλλόμενοι1Let us not lay again the foundation … of faith in GodBasic teachings are spoken of as if they were a building whose construction begins by laying a **foundation**. Alternate translation: “let us not repeat the basic teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
545HEB61d5q3figs-metaphorνεκρῶν ἔργων1dead worksSinful deeds are spoken of as if they belonged to the world of the **dead**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
546HEB62s1cvfigs-metaphorβαπτισμῶν διδαχὴν, ἐπιθέσεώς τε χειρῶν, ἀναστάσεώς τε νεκρῶν, καὶ κρίματος αἰωνίου1nor the foundation of teaching … eternal judgmentThe writer continues from the previous verse speaking about basic teachings as if they were a building whose construction begins by laying a foundation. Alternate translation: “nor the basic teaching about baptisms, and laying on of hands, and resurrection of the dead, and eternal judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
547HEB62xww5ἐπιθέσεώς…χειρῶν1laying on of handsThe practice of **laying on of hands** was done to set someone apart for special service or position.
548HEB64e7pxfigs-metaphorτοὺς ἅπαξ φωτισθέντας1those who were once enlightenedUnderstanding is spoken of as if it were illumination. Alternate translation: “those who once understood the message about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
549HEB64l5mcfigs-metaphorγευσαμένους…τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς ἐπουρανίου1who tasted the heavenly giftExperiencing salvation is spoken of as if it were tasting food. Alternate translation: “who experienced Gods saving power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
550HEB64d2lpfigs-metaphorμετόχους γενηθέντας Πνεύματος Ἁγίου1who were sharers of the Holy SpiritThe **Holy Spirit**, who comes to believers, is spoken of as if he were an object that people could share. Alternate translation: “who received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
551HEB65vp46figs-metaphorκαλὸν γευσαμένους Θεοῦ ῥῆμα1who tasted Gods good wordLearning Gods message is spoken of as if it were tasting food. Alternate translation: “who learned Gods good message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
552HEB65tw1ufigs-metonymyδυνάμεις…μέλλοντος αἰῶνος1the powers of the age to comeThis means the power of God when his kingdom is fully present in all the world. In this sense, **the powers** refer to God himself, who holds all power. Alternate translation: “learned how God will work powerfully in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
553HEB66l8nxπάλιν ἀνακαινίζειν εἰς μετάνοιαν1it is impossible to restore them again to repentanceAlternate translation: “it is impossible to bring them back to repent again”
554HEB66dj3gfigs-metaphorἀνασταυροῦντας ἑαυτοῖς τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ1they crucify the Son of God for themselves againWhen people turn away from God, it is as though they crucify Jesus again. Alternate translation: “it is like they crucify for themselves the very Son of God again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
555HEB66y47bguidelines-sonofgodprinciplesτὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ1Son of God**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
556HEB67p4tffigs-personificationγῆ…ἡ πιοῦσα τὸν…ὑετόν1the land that drinks in the rainFarmland that benefits from much **rain** is spoken of as if it were a person who drinks in the rainwater. Alternate translation: “the land that absorbs the rain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
557HEB67r32nfigs-personificationτίκτουσα βοτάνην1that gives birth to the plantsFarmland that **produces** crops is spoken of as if it gives birth to them. Alternate translation: “that produces plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
558HEB67da68figs-personificationμεταλαμβάνει εὐλογίας ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ1the land that receives a blessing from GodRain and crops are seen as proof that **God** has helped the farmland. The farmland is spoken of as if it were a person who could receive Gods **blessing**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
559HEB67qq1xεὐλογίας ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ1a blessing from GodHere, **blessing** means help from God, not spoken words.
560HEB68pp48figs-metaphorκατάρας ἐγγύς1is near to a curseThis speaks of **a curse** as if it were a place to which a person could draw near. Alternate translation: “is in danger of God cursing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
561HEB68a2bkἧς τὸ τέλος εἰς καῦσιν1Its end is in burningThe farmer will burn all the worthless things in the field.
562HEB69sb4afigs-pronounsπεπείσμεθα1we are convincedEven though the author uses the plural pronoun **we**, he is most likely referring only to himself. Alternate translation: “I am convinced” or “I am certain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
563HEB69jt3kτὰ κρείσσονα1about better things concerning youHere, **better things** means they are doing better than those who have rejected God, disobeyed him, and now can no longer repent so that God will forgive them ([Hebrews 6:4-6](./04.md)). Alternate translation: “that you are doing better things than what I have mentioned”
564HEB69npu2figs-abstractnounsἐχόμενα σωτηρίας1things that concern salvationYou can state the abstract noun **salvation** as a verb. Alternate translation: “things that concern God saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
565HEB610t2hbfigs-doublenegativesοὐ γὰρ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ἐπιλαθέσθαι1For God is not so unjust that he would forgetThis double negative **not unjust** can mean that God in his justice will remember what good things his people have done. Alternate translation: “For God is just and therefore will certainly remember” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
566HEB610r9xxfigs-metonymyεἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ1for his nameGods **name** is a metonym that stands for God himself. Alternate translation: “for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
567HEB611j7f5figs-pronounsἐπιθυμοῦμεν1We greatly desireEven though the author uses the plural pronoun **we**, he is most likely referring only to himself. Alternate translation: “I greatly desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
568HEB611k4siσπουδὴν1diligencecareful, hard work
569HEB611xfy1figs-explicitἄχρι τέλους1to the endYou can state explicitly the implicit meaning of **the end**. Alternate translation: “to the end of your lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
570HEB611i2ycπρὸς τὴν πληροφορίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος1in order to make your hope certainAlternate translation: “in order to have complete certainty that you will receive what God has promised you”
571HEB612yrh2μιμηταὶ1imitatorsAn “imitator” is someone who copies the behavior of someone else.
572HEB612q8ryfigs-metaphorκληρονομούντων τὰς ἐπαγγελίας1inherit the promisesReceiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “who … receive what God promised them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
573HEB614ymh2λέγων1He saidGod said
574HEB614n47afigs-metonymyπληθύνων, πληθυνῶ σε1I will greatly increase youHere, **increase** stands for giving descendants. Alternate translation: “I will give you many descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
575HEB617rpv9figs-metaphorτοῖς κληρονόμοις τῆς ἐπαγγελίας1to the heirs of the promiseThe people to whom God has made promises are spoken of as if they were to inherit property and wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “to those who would receive what he promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
576HEB617ug6jτὸ ἀμετάθετον τῆς βουλῆς αὐτοῦ1the unchangeable quality of his purposeAlternate translation: “that his purpose would never change” or “that he would always do what he said he would do”
577HEB618gjw3figs-metaphorοἱ καταφυγόντες1we, who have fled for refugeBelievers who trust in God for him to protect them are spoken of as if they were running to a safe place. Alternate translation: “we, who have trusted him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
578HEB618gk6nfigs-metaphorἰσχυρὰν παράκλησιν ἔχωμεν, οἱ καταφυγόντες κρατῆσαι τῆς προκειμένης ἐλπίδος1will have a strong encouragement to hold firmly to the hope set before usTrust in God is spoken of as if **encouragement** were an object that could be presented to a person and that person could **hold** on to it. Alternate translation: “we who have fled for refuge will continue to trust in God just has he encouraged us to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
579HEB618hs84figs-activepassiveπροκειμένης1set before usIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God has placed before us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
580HEB619w66k0Connecting Statement:Having finished his third warning and encouragement to the believers, the writer of Hebrews continues his comparison of Jesus as priest to Melchizedek as priest.
581HEB619ng9ifigs-metaphorὡς ἄγκυραν…τῆς ψυχῆς, ἀσφαλῆ τε καὶ βεβαίαν1as a secure and reliable anchor for the soulJust as **an anchor** keeps a boat from drifting in the water, Jesus keeps us secure in Gods presence. Alternate translation: “that causes us to live securely in Gods presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
582HEB619vdt3figs-doubletἄγκυραν…τῆς ψυχῆς, ἀσφαλῆ τε καὶ βεβαίαν1a secure and reliable anchorHere the words **reliable** and **steadfast** mean basically the same thing and emphasize the complete reliability of the anchor. Alternate translation: “an anchor for the soul that is completely reliable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
583HEB619d223figs-personificationἣν…καὶ εἰσερχομένην εἰς τὸ ἐσώτερον τοῦ καταπετάσματος1hope that enters into the inner place behind the curtainHere, **which** refers back to our “hope” in the previous verse. This hope is spoken of as if it were a person who could go into the most holy place of the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
584HEB619aj2mfigs-metaphorτὸ ἐσώτερον1the inner placeThe **inner place** was the most holy place in the temple. It was thought to be the place where God was most intensely present among his people. In this passage, this place stands for heaven and Gods throne room. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
585HEB620zgj6κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ1after the order of MelchizedekThe **order of Melchizedek** means that Christ as a priest has things in common with **Melchizedek** as a priest. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest”
586HEB7introy8j30# Hebrews 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:17, 21, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### High priest<br><br>Only a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi.
587HEB71mwy80Connecting Statement:The writer of Hebrews continues his comparison of Jesus as priest to Melchizedek as priest.
588HEB71rfc9translate-namesΣαλήμ1Salem**Salem** was the name of a city during the time of Abraham. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
589HEB71rx36figs-explicitἈβραὰμ ὑποστρέφοντι ἀπὸ τῆς κοπῆς τῶν βασιλέων1Abraham returning from the slaughter of the kingsThis is refers to when **Abraham** and his men went and defeated the armies of four kings in order to rescue his nephew, Lot, and his family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
590HEB72q87x1It was to himAlternate translation: “and it was to Melchizedek”
591HEB72abh4βασιλεὺς δικαιοσύνης…βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης1king of righteousness … king of peaceAlternate translation: “righteous king … peaceful king”
592HEB73q4ehἀπάτωρ, ἀμήτωρ, ἀγενεαλόγητος, μήτε ἀρχὴν ἡμερῶν, μήτε ζωῆς τέλος ἔχων1He is without father, without mother, without ancestors, with neither beginning of days nor end of lifeIt is possible to think from this passage that Melchizedek was neither born nor did he die. However, it is likely that all the writer means is that the Scriptures provide no information about Melchizedeks ancestry, birth, or death.
593HEB74h2bg0Connecting Statement:The writer states that the priesthood of Melchizedek is better than Aarons priesthood and then reminds them that the priesthood of Aaron did not make anything perfect.
594HEB74w2ggοὗτος1this man wasAlternate translation: “Melchizedek was”
595HEB75l9zqfigs-distinguishοἱ μὲν ἐκ τῶν υἱῶν Λευεὶ τὴν ἱερατείαν λαμβάνοντες1The sons of Levi who receive the priesthoodThe author says this because not all of Levis **sons** became priests. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Levi who became priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
596HEB75hn3kτὸν λαὸν1from the peopleAlternate translation: “from the people of Israel”
597HEB75ri2yτοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτῶν1from their brothersHere, **brothers** means they are all related to each other through Abraham. Alternate translation: “from their relatives”
598HEB75x4zafigs-metaphorἐξεληλυθότας ἐκ τῆς ὀσφύος Ἀβραάμ1they, too, have come from Abrahams bodyThe phrase **from the loins of Abraham** is a way of saying that they were descendants of Abraham. Alternate translation: “they, too, are descendants of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
599HEB76r2rsὁ…μὴ γενεαλογούμενος ἐξ αὐτῶν1whose descent was not traced from themAlternate translation: “the one who was not a descendant of Levi”
600HEB76d2hqfigs-metaphorτὸν ἔχοντα τὰς ἐπαγγελίας1the one who had the promisesThe things that God promised to do for Abraham are spoken of as if they were objects that he could possess. Alternate translation: “the one to whom God had spoken his promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
601HEB77k6pcfigs-activepassiveτὸ ἔλαττον ὑπὸ τοῦ κρείττονος εὐλογεῖται1the lesser person is blessed by the greater personIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the more important person blesses the less important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
602HEB78sf79ὧδε μὲν…ἐκεῖ1In this case … in that caseThese phrases are used to compare the Levite priests with Melchizedek. Your language may have a way to emphasize that the author is making a comparison.
603HEB78c9zzfigs-metaphorμαρτυρούμενος ὅτι ζῇ1is testified that he lives onIt is never explicitly written in scripture that Melchizedek dies. The author of Hebrews speaks of this absence of information about Melchizedeks death in scripture as if it were a positive statement that he is still alive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
604HEB78d1yrfigs-activepassiveμαρτυρούμενος ὅτι ζῇ1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “scripture shows that he lives on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
605HEB79v1yufigs-metaphorδι’ Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Λευεὶς, ὁ δεκάτας λαμβάνων, δεδεκάτωται1Levi, who received tithes, also paid tithes through AbrahamSince **Levi** had not been born yet, the author speaks of him as still being in Abrahams body when Abraham met Melchizedek. In this way, the author argues that Levi **paid tithes** to Melchizedek through **Abraham**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
606HEB710g26sfigs-metaphorἔτι…ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ τοῦ πατρὸς ἦν1Levi was in the body of his ancestorSince Levi had not been born yet, the author speaks of him as still being in Abrahams body. In this way, the author argues that Levi paid tithes to Melchizedek through Abraham. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
607HEB711kdb8μὲν οὖν1NowHere, **So** is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
608HEB711wgp5figs-rquestionτίς ἔτι χρεία κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ, ἕτερον ἀνίστασθαι ἱερέα, καὶ οὐ κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν λέγεσθαι?1what further need would there have been for another priest to arise after the manner of Melchizedek, and not be considered to be after the manner of Aaron?This question emphasizes that it was unexpected that priests come after **the order of Melchizedek**. Alternate translation: “no one would have needed another priest, one who was like Melchizedek and not like Aaron, to arise.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
609HEB711hi4eἀνίστασθαι1to ariseAlternate translation: “to come” or “to appear”
610HEB711cc5fκατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ1after the manner of MelchizedekThis means that Christ as a priest has things in common with **Melchizedek** as a priest. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest”
611HEB711kt3afigs-activepassiveοὐ κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν λέγεσθαι1not be considered to be after the manner of AaronIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “not be after the manner of Aaron” or “who is not a priest like Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
612HEB712c7f1figs-activepassiveμετατιθεμένης γὰρ τῆς ἱερωσύνης, ἐξ ἀνάγκης καὶ νόμου μετάθεσις γίνεται1For when the priesthood is changed, the law must also be changedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For when God changed the priesthood, he also had to change the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
613HEB713k9ziὃν1For the oneHere, **whom** refers to Jesus.
614HEB713m9mmfigs-activepassiveἐφ’ ὃν…λέγεται ταῦτα1about whom these things are saidIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “about whom I am speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
615HEB714t3dmγὰρ1Now**For** is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
616HEB714qsk5ἐξ Ἰούδα ἀνατέταλκεν ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν1it is from Judah that our Lord was bornThe words **our Lord** refer to Jesus.
617HEB714ln94ἐξ Ἰούδα1from JudahAlternate translation: “from the tribe of Judah”
618HEB715i17g0General Information:This quote comes from a psalm of King David.
619HEB715jn1pπερισσότερον ἔτι κατάδηλόν ἐστιν1What we say is clearer yetAlternate translation: “we can understand even more clearly”
620HEB715md9iεἰ…ἀνίσταται ἱερεὺς ἕτερος1if another priest arisesAlternate translation: “if another priest comes”
621HEB715z1ylκατὰ τὴν ὁμοιότητα Μελχισέδεκ1in the likeness of MelchizedekThis means that Christ as a priest has things in common with **Melchizedek** as a priest. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest”
622HEB716fr4aὃς οὐ κατὰ νόμον…γέγονεν1It was not based on the lawAlternate translation: “his becoming priest was not based on a law”
623HEB716erq7figs-metonymyνόμον ἐντολῆς σαρκίνης1the law of fleshly descentThe idea of human descent is spoken of as if it had only to do with the flesh of ones body. Alternate translation: “the law of human descent” or “the law about priests descendants becoming priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
624HEB717xmj8figs-personificationμαρτυρεῖται γὰρ1For scripture witnesses about himThis speaks about scripture as if it were a person who could witness about something. Alternate translation: “For God witnesses about him through the scriptures” or “For this is what was written about him in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
625HEB717g6zdκατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ1according to the order of MelchizedekThere were two groups of priests. One was made up of the descendants of Levi. The other was made up of **Melchizedek** and Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “according to the line of Melchizedek” or “according to the priesthood of Melchizedek”
626HEB719ia8jfigs-personificationοὐδὲν…ἐτελείωσεν ὁ νόμος1the law made nothing perfectHere, **the law** is spoken of as if it were a person who could act. Alternate translation: “no one could become perfect by obeying the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
627HEB719stc2figs-activepassiveἐπεισαγωγὴ…κρείττονος ἐλπίδος1a better hope is introducedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has introduced a better hope” or “God has given us reason for a more confident hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
628HEB719c9tzfigs-metaphorδι’ ἧς ἐγγίζομεν τῷ Θεῷ1through which we come near to GodWorshiping God and having his favor are spoken of as to **come near** to him. Alternate translation: “and because of this hope we approach God” or “and because of this hope we worship God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
629HEB720f3cd0General Information:This quote comes from the same psalm of David as [Hebrews 7:17](../07/17.md).
630HEB720vf69figs-explicitκαὶ καθ’ ὅσον οὐ χωρὶς ὁρκωμοσίας1And it was not without an oath!You can state this clearly who made this **oath**. Alternate translation: “And God did not choose this new priest without swearing an oath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
631HEB720ziqefigs-doublenegativesκαὶ καθ’ ὅσον οὐ χωρὶς ὁρκωμοσίας1The double negative **not without** emphasizes that Jesus became a priest through an oath. Alternate translation: “And it was because God swore an oath that the Lord became the new priest!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
632HEB722h4620Connecting Statement:The writer then assures these Jewish believers that Christ has the better priesthood because he lives forever and the priests that descended from Aaron all died.
633HEB722e23dκρείττονος διαθήκης, γέγονεν ἔγγυος1has given the guarantee of a better covenantAlternate translation: “has told us that we can be sure that there will be a better covenant”
634HEB724u941figs-abstractnounsἀπαράβατον ἔχει τὴν ἱερωσύνην1he has a permanent priesthoodA priests work is spoken of as if it were an object that Jesus possesses. This can be worded to avoid the abstract noun **priesthood**. Alternate translation: “he is a priest permanently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
635HEB725a4ggfigs-explicitὅθεν1Therefore heYou can make explicit what **Therefore** implies. Alternate translation: “Because Christ is our high priest who lives forever,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
636HEB725b182τοὺς προσερχομένους δι’ αὐτοῦ τῷ Θεῷ1those who approach God through himAlternate translation: “those who come to God because of what Jesus has done”
637HEB726cmq1figs-metaphorὑψηλότερος τῶν οὐρανῶν γενόμενος1has become higher than the heavensThe author speaks of possessing more honor and power than anyone else as if it were position that is up above all things. Alternate translation: “God has given him more honor and power than anyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
638HEB727b6nvτῶν ἰδίων…ἐποίησεν…ἑαυτὸν1Here, **his own** refers to the Levitical priests. The second **he** and the word **himself** refer to Christ.
639HEB728n693figs-metonymyὁ νόμος…ἀνθρώπους καθίστησιν ἀρχιερεῖς ἔχοντας ἀσθένειαν1the law appoints as high priests men who have weaknessesHere, **the law** is a metonym for the men who appointed the **high priests** according to the law of Moses. The focus is not on the men who did this, but on the fact that they did this according to the law. Alternate translation: “according to the law, men appoint as high priests men who have weaknesses” or “for according to the law, men who have weaknesses are appointed as high priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
640HEB728u5nyἀνθρώπους…ἔχοντας ἀσθένειαν1men who have weaknessesAlternate translation: “men who are spiritually weak” or “men who are weak against sin”
641HEB728yez2figs-metonymyὁ λόγος…τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας, τῆς μετὰ τὸν νόμον, Υἱόν1the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a SonHere, **the word of the oath** represents God who made the oath. Alternate translation: “God appointed a Son by his oath, which he made after he gave the law” or “after he had given the law, God swore an oath and appointed his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
642HEB728msa4guidelines-sonofgodprinciplesΥἱόν1Son**Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
643HEB728fkl3figs-activepassiveτετελειωμένον1who has been made perfectIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “who has completely obeyed God and become mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
644HEB8introks940# Hebrews 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The author finishes describing how and why Jesus is the most important high priest. Then he begins to speak about how the new covenant is better to the covenant God made with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 8:8-12, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### New covenant<br><br>The author tells how Jesus has established a new covenant that is better than the covenant that God established with the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
645HEB81nb8q0Connecting Statement:The writer, having shown that Christs priesthood is better than the earthly priesthood, shows that the earthly priesthood was a pattern of heavenly things. Christ has a superior ministry, a superior covenant.
646HEB81tw7lδὲ1Now**Now** does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
647HEB81m2b4figs-exclusiveἔχομεν ἀρχιερέα1We have a high priestThe author is including the readers here, so the word **We** is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
648HEB81b8qytranslate-symactionἐκάθισεν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ θρόνου τῆς Μεγαλωσύνης1sat down at the right hand of the throne of the MajestyTo sit at the **right hand** of God is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Hebrews 1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “sat down at the place of honor and authority beside the throne of the Majesty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
649HEB82lrb7τῆς σκηνῆς τῆς ἀληθινῆς, ἣν ἔπηξεν ὁ Κύριος, οὐκ ἄνθρωπος1the true tabernacle that the Lord, not a man, set upPeople built the earthly **tabernacle** out of animal skins fastened to a wooden framework, and they set it up in the manner of a tent. Here, **true tabernacle** means the heavenly tabernacle that God created.
650HEB83su9jfigs-activepassiveπᾶς γὰρ ἀρχιερεὺς…καθίσταται1For every high priest is appointedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For God appoints every priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
651HEB84p2v6οὖν1Now**Now** does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
652HEB84gfz1κατὰ νόμον1according to the lawAlternate translation: “as God requires in the law”
653HEB85t3i8figs-metaphorοἵτινες ὑποδείγματι καὶ σκιᾷ λατρεύουσιν τῶν ἐπουρανίων1They serve a copy and shadow of the heavenly thingsThe words **copy** and **shadow** are metaphors meaning that something is not the real thing but it is similar to the real thing. Alternate translation: “who serve what is a vague image of the heavenly things” or “who serve what is only similar to the heavenly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
654HEB85m067figs-doubletὑποδείγματι καὶ σκιᾷ…τῶν ἐπουρανίων1The words **copy** and **shadow** have similar meanings and emphasize that the priesthood and the earthly temple were only images of Christ, the true high priest, and the heavenly temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
655HEB85k5r1figs-activepassiveκαθὼς κεχρημάτισται Μωϋσῆς, μέλλων1It is just as Moses was warned by God when he wasIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as God warned Moses when Moses was about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
656HEB85qb7gfigs-explicitμέλλων ἐπιτελεῖν τὴν σκηνήν1was about to construct the tabernacleMoses did not construct the **tabernacle** himself. He ordered the people to construct it. Alternate translation: “when he was about to command the people to construct the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
657HEB85jk6iὅρα1See thatAlternate translation: “Make sure that”
658HEB85wf1pτὸν τύπον1to the patternAlternate translation: “the design”
659HEB85s9xefigs-activepassiveτὸν δειχθέντα σοι1that was shown to youIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that I showed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
660HEB85j3tzfigs-explicitἐν τῷ ὄρει1on the mountainYou can make explicit that the **mountain** refers to Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
661HEB86qdj60Connecting Statement:This section begins to show that the new covenant is better than the old covenant with Israel and Judah.
662HEB86rt2afigs-activepassiveτέτυχεν1Christ has receivedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has given Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
663HEB86spy1κρείττονός…διαθήκης μεσίτης1mediator of a better covenantThis means Christ caused a **better covenant** between God and humans to exist.
664HEB86aw58figs-activepassiveἥτις ἐπὶ κρείττοσιν ἐπαγγελίαις νενομοθέτηται1covenant, which is based on better promisesIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which God made based on better promises” or “in which God promised better things when he made this covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
665HEB87wb9dtranslate-ordinalἡ πρώτη…δευτέρας1first covenant … second covenantThe words **first** and **second** are ordinal numbers. Alternate translation: “old covenant … for a new covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
666HEB87gig6ἦν ἄμεμπτος1had been faultlessAlternate translation: “had been perfect”
667HEB88ya4n0General Information:In this quotation the prophet Jeremiah foretold of a new covenant that God would make.
668HEB88sqb4αὐτοῖς1with the peopleAlternate translation: “with the people of Israel”
669HEB88xhp8ἰδοὺ1SeeAlternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you”
670HEB88c6zmfigs-metaphorτὸν οἶκον Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον Ἰούδα1the house of Israel and with the house of JudahThe people of **Israel** and **Judah** are spoken of as if they were houses. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel and with the people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
671HEB89dde5figs-metaphorἐπιλαβομένου μου τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῶν, ἐξαγαγεῖν αὐτοὺς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου1I took them by their hand to lead them out of the land of EgyptThis metaphor represents Gods great love and concern as if he were holding their hands in order to physically **lead them out** of **Egypt**. Alternate translation: “when I led them out of Egypt like a father leads his young child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
672HEB810fh1c0General Information:This is a quotation from the prophet Jeremiah.
673HEB810k2ewfigs-metaphorτῷ οἴκῳ Ἰσραὴλ1the house of IsraelThe people of **Israel** are spoken of as if they were a **house**. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
674HEB810q78uμετὰ τὰς ἡμέρας ἐκείνας1after those daysAlternate translation: “after that time”
675HEB810gbw3figs-metaphorδιδοὺς νόμους μου εἰς τὴν διάνοιαν αὐτῶν1I will put my laws into their mindsGods **laws** are spoken of as if they were objects that could be placed somewhere. Peoples ability to think is spoken of as if it were a place. Alternate translation: “I will enable them to understand my laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
676HEB810e45gfigs-metonymyἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν ἐπιγράψω αὐτούς1I will also write them on their heartsHere, **hearts** is a metonym for a persons inner being. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
677HEB810ojsyfigs-metaphorἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν ἐπιγράψω αὐτούς1The phrase **write them on their hearts** is a metaphor for enabling people to obey the law. Alternate translation: “I will also put them in their hearts” or “I will enable them to obey my law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
678HEB810hs53ἔσομαι αὐτοῖς εἰς Θεόν1I will be their GodAlternate translation: “I will be the God they worship”
679HEB810xgm3αὐτοὶ ἔσονταί μοι εἰς λαόν1they will be my peopleAlternate translation: “they will be the people for whom I care”
680HEB811lsq60General Information:This continues the quotation from the prophet Jeremiah.
681HEB811jl1hfigs-quotationsοὐ μὴ διδάξωσιν ἕκαστος τὸν πολίτην αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἕκαστος τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ λέγων, γνῶθι τὸν Κύριον1They will not teach each one his neighbor and each one his brother, saying, Know the Lord.You can state this direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “they will not need to teach their neighbors or brothers to know me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
682HEB811wne2figs-doubletτὸν πολίτην…τὸν ἀδελφὸν1neighbor … brotherBoth **fellow citizen** and **brother** mean the same thing and refer to fellow Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
683HEB811q5kifigs-metonymyγνῶθι τὸν Κύριον…πάντες εἰδήσουσίν με1Know the Lord … will all know me**Know** here stands for acknowledging God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
684HEB812cu1bfigs-metonymyταῖς ἀδικίαις αὐτῶν1toward their evil deedsHere, **evil deeds** stands for the people who committed these evil deeds. Alternate translation: “to those who did evil deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
685HEB812a1xrfigs-metonymyτῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν οὐ μὴ μνησθῶ ἔτι1their sins I will not remember any longerHere, **remember** stands for “think about.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
686HEB9introp8vy0# Hebrews 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter describes how Jesus is better than the temple and all its laws and rules. This chapter will be difficult to understand if the first five books of the Old Testament have not yet been translated.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Will<br><br>A will is a legal document that describes what will happen to a persons property after he dies.<br><br>### Blood<br><br>In the Old Testament, God had commanded the Israelites to offer sacrifices so that he would forgive their sins. Before they could offer these sacrifices, they had to kill animals and then offer not only the animals body but also its blood. Shedding blood is a metaphor for killing an animal or person. Jesus offered his life, his blood, as a sacrifice when he allowed men to kill him. The writer of the Book of Hebrews is saying in this chapter that this sacrifice is better than the sacrifices of the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])<br><br>### Return of Christ<br><br>Jesus will return to finish the work that he began when he died so that God would forgive his peoples sins. He will finish saving those people who are waiting for him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### First covenant<br><br>This refers to the covenant that God made with Moses. However, before he made this covenant, God had made a covenant with Abraham. But this was the first covenant that God had made with the people of Israel. You may decide to translate “the first covenant” as “the earlier covenant.”
687HEB91af6x0Connecting Statement:The writer makes clear to these Jewish believers that the laws and the tabernacle of the old covenant were only pictures of the better, new covenant.
688HEB91av9iοὖν1Now**Now** marks a new part of the teaching.
689HEB91d3vsἡ πρώτη1first covenantSee how you translated **first covenant** in [Hebrews 8:7](../08/07.md).
690HEB91pw63εἶχε…δικαιώματα1had regulationsAlternate translation: “had detailed instructions” or “had rules”
691HEB92e3emγὰρ1ForThe author is continuing the discussion from [Hebrews 8:7](../08/07.md).
692HEB92f6k7figs-activepassiveσκηνὴ…κατεσκευάσθη1a tabernacle was preparedA **tabernacle** was constructed and made ready for use. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Israelites prepared a tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
693HEB92t13aἥ τε λυχνία καὶ ἡ τράπεζα, καὶ ἡ Πρόθεσις τῶν ἄρτων1the lampstand, the table, and the bread of the presenceThese objects are all accompanied by the definite article **the**, because these are specific things that the author assumes that his readers already know about.
694HEB92gw3pfigs-abstractnounsἡ Πρόθεσις τῶν ἄρτων1bread of the presenceYou can reworded the abstract noun **presentation** to express it with the verb “display” or “present.” Alternate translation: “the bread on display before God” or “the bread the priests presented to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
695HEB93j7w3μετὰ…τὸ δεύτερον καταπέτασμα1Behind the second curtainThe first curtain was the outer wall of the tabernacle, so the **second curtain** was the curtain between the “holy place” and the “most holy place.”
696HEB93ssr9translate-ordinalδεύτερον1secondThe word **second** is the ordinal word for number two. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
697HEB94kt3uἐν ᾗ1Inside itAlternate translation: “inside the ark of the covenant was”
698HEB94jj9yfigs-explicitἡ ῥάβδος Ἀαρὼν ἡ βλαστήσασα1Aarons rod that buddedThis was the **rod** that **Aaron** had when God proved to the people of Israel that he had chosen Aaron as his priest by making Aarons rod bud. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
699HEB94md1fἡ βλαστήσασα1that buddedAlternate translation: “from which leaves and flowers had grown”
700HEB94q9w3αἱ πλάκες τῆς διαθήκης1tablets of the covenantHere, **tablets** are flat pieces of stone that had writing on them. This refers to the stone tablets on which the ten commandments were written.
701HEB95ue5qΧερουβεὶν δόξης κατασκιάζοντα τὸ ἱλαστήριον1glorious cherubim overshadowed the atonement lidWhen the Israelites were making the ark of the covenant, God commanded them to carve two **cherubim** facing each other, with their wings touching, over the **atonement lid** of the ark of the covenant. Here they are spoken of as providing shade for the ark of the covenant. Alternate translation: “glorious cherubim covered the atonement lid with their wings”
702HEB95fh6gfigs-metonymyΧερουβεὶν1cherubimHere, **cherubim** refers to the carved figures of two cherubim. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
703HEB96mra7figs-activepassiveτούτων…οὕτως κατεσκευασμένων1After these things were preparedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after the priests prepared these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
704HEB97xs9lfigs-doublenegativesοὐ χωρὶς αἵματος1not without bloodYou can state the double negative **not without** in positive form. Alternate translation: “enters, and he always brings blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
705HEB97xtk5αἵματος1bloodThis is the **blood** of the bull and goat that the high priest had to sacrifice on the Day of Atonement.
706HEB98a26fτῶν ἁγίων1the most holy placeHere, **the holy place** could refer to: (1) the inner room of the tabernacle on earth. (2) Gods presence in heaven.
707HEB98e14cfigs-metonymyἔτι τῆς πρώτης σκηνῆς ἐχούσης στάσιν1the first tabernacle was still standingThis could mean: (1) the outer room of the **tabernacle** was still standing. (2) the earthly **tabernacle** and the sacrificial system still existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
708HEB99cu76ἥτις παραβολὴ1This was an illustrationAlternate translation: “and this first tabernacle is a picture”
709HEB99fl6iεἰς τὸν καιρὸν τὸν ἐνεστηκότα1for the present timeAlternate translation: “for now”
710HEB99g16ufigs-activepassiveπροσφέρονται1that are now being offeredIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the priests now offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
711HEB99qsa1figs-metaphorμὴ δυνάμεναι κατὰ συνείδησιν τελειῶσαι τὸν λατρεύοντα1are not able to perfect the worshipers conscienceThe writer speaks of a persons **conscience** as if it were an object that could be made better and better until it was without fault. A persons conscience is his knowledge of right and wrong. It is also his awareness of whether or not he has done wrong. If he knows he has done wrong, we say that he feels guilty. Alternate translation: “are not able to make the worshiper free from guilt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
712HEB99c31dfigs-genericnounτὸν λατρεύοντα1the worshipers conscienceThe writer appears to refer to only one **worshiper**, but he means all those who came to worship God at the tabernacle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
713HEB910hqs8μέχρι καιροῦ διορθώσεως1until the time of the new orderAlternate translation: “until God created the new order”
714HEB911bnc60Connecting Statement:Having described the service of the tabernacle under Gods law, the writer makes clear that Christs service under the new covenant is better because it is sealed with his blood. It is better also because Christ has entered the true “tabernacle,” that is, Gods own presence in heaven, instead of entering, as other high priests, into the earthly tabernacle, which was only an imperfect copy.
715HEB911da2iτῶν…ἀγαθῶν1good thingsHere, **good things** does not refer to material things. It means the good things that God promised in his new covenant.
716HEB911czx6τῆς μείζονος καὶ τελειοτέρας σκηνῆς1the greater and more perfect tabernacleThis refers to the heavenly tent or **tabernacle**, which is more important and more perfect than the earthly tabernacle.
717HEB911lxw8figs-activepassiveοὐ χειροποιήτου1that was not made by human handsIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that humans hands did not make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
718HEB911mtj9figs-synecdocheχειροποιήτου1human handsHere, **hands** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
719HEB912wp9nfigs-metaphorἅγια1most holy placeGods presence in heaven is spoken of as if it were the **holy place**, the innermost room in the tabernacle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
720HEB913ch3cσποδὸς δαμάλεως, ῥαντίζουσα τοὺς κεκοινωμένους1sprinkling of a heifers ashes on those who have become uncleanThe priest would throw small amounts of the **ashes** on the **unclean** people.
721HEB913seb3figs-metonymyπρὸς τὴν τῆς σαρκὸς καθαρότητα1for the cleansing of their fleshHere, **flesh** refers to the entire body. Alternate translation: “for the cleansing of their bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
722HEB914t58wfigs-exclamationsπόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὃς διὰ Πνεύματος αἰωνίου, ἑαυτὸν προσήνεγκεν ἄμωμον τῷ Θεῷ, καθαριεῖ τὴν συνείδησιν ὑμῶν ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων, εἰς τὸ λατρεύειν Θεῷ ζῶντι!1how much more will the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered himself without blemish to God, cleanse our conscience from dead works to serve the living God?The author uses this exclamation to emphasize that Christs sacrifice was the most powerful. Alternate translation: “then certainly Christs blood will cleanse our conscience even more from dead works to serve the living God! Because, through the eternal Spirit, he offered himself without blemish to God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
723HEB914r22pfigs-metonymyτὸ αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ1the blood of ChristThe **blood** of Christ refers to his death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
724HEB914xj6gfigs-metaphorἄμωμον1without blemishA **blemish** is a small sin or moral fault spoken of here as if it were a small, unusual spot or defect on Christs body. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
725HEB914rkh4figs-metonymyτὴν συνείδησιν ὑμῶν1cleanse our conscienceHere, **conscience** refers to a persons feeling of guilt. Believers no longer have to feel guilty for the sins they have committed because Jesus sacrificed himself and has forgiven them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
726HEB914suu7figs-metaphorκαθαριεῖ1cleanseHere, **cleanse** stands for the action of relieving our consciences from guilt for the sins we have committed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
727HEB914zbj1figs-metaphorνεκρῶν ἔργων1dead worksSinful deeds are spoken of as if they belonged to the world of the **dead**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
728HEB915x3xrδιὰ τοῦτο1For this reasonAlternate translation: “as a result” or “because of this”
729HEB915p2kgδιαθήκης καινῆς μεσίτης ἐστίν1he is the mediator of a new covenantHere being a **mediator** means Christ caused the **new covenant** between God and humans to exist.
730HEB915q3x3τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ1first covenantSee how you translated **first covenant** in [Hebrews 8:7](../08/07.md).
731HEB915z29afigs-metonymyεἰς ἀπολύτρωσιν τῶν ἐπὶ τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ παραβάσεων1to free those under the first covenant from their sinsHere, **their transgressions** is a metonym for: (1) the guilt of their transgressions. Alternate translation: “to take away the guilt of those who were under the first covenant” (2) the punishment for their transgressions. Alternate translation: “to take away the punishment for the transgressions of those who were under the first covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
732HEB915ve3vfigs-activepassiveοἱ κεκλημένοι1those who are calledIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom God has chosen to be his children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
733HEB915xb9ffigs-metaphorτῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας1inheritanceReceiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
734HEB916um9aθάνατον ἀνάγκη φέρεσθαι τοῦ διαθεμένου1the death of the person who made it must be provenIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone must prove that the person who made the will has died”
735HEB918wpf1figs-activepassiveὅθεν οὐδ’ ἡ πρώτη χωρὶς αἵματος ἐνκεκαίνισται1So not even the first covenant was established without bloodIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “So God did not even establish the first covenant without blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
736HEB918m9c3figs-doublenegativesὅθεν οὐδ’ ἡ πρώτη χωρὶς αἵματος ἐνκεκαίνισται1You can state the double negative **not even … without** in positive form. Alternate translation: “So God established even the first covenant with blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
737HEB918kq87πρώτη1first covenantSee how you translated **first covenant** in [Hebrews 8:7](../08/07.md).
738HEB918v838figs-metonymyαἵματος1bloodThe death of animals sacrificed to God is spoken of as if it were nothing but **blood**. Alternate translation: “the death of animals sacrificed to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
739HEB919zl2ntranslate-symactionλαβὼν τὸ αἷμα τῶν μόσχων, καὶ τῶν τράγων, μετὰ ὕδατος, καὶ ἐρίου κοκκίνου, καὶ ὑσσώπου, αὐτό τε τὸ βιβλίον καὶ πάντα τὸν λαὸν, ἐράντισεν1took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the peopleThe priest dipped the **hyssop** in the **blood** and the **water** and then shook the hyssop so drops of blood and water would fall on the scroll and on the **people**. Sprinkling was a symbolic action done by the priests by which they applied the benefits of the covenant to people and to objects. Here the scroll and the peoples acceptability to God are renewed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
740HEB919tgc2ὑσσώπου1hyssopHyssop was a woody shrub with flowers in summer, used in ceremonial sprinkling.
741HEB920j7enfigs-metonymyτὸ αἷμα τῆς διαθήκης1the blood of the covenantHere, **blood** refers to the death of the animals sacrificed to carry out the covenants requirements. Alternate translation: “the death of the animals that brings into effect the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
742HEB921k6dmἐράντισεν1he sprinkledAlternate translation: “Moses sprinkled”
743HEB921l27vtranslate-symactionἐράντισεν1sprinkledSprinkling was a symbolic action done by the priests by which they applied the benefits of the covenant to people and to objects. See how you translated this in [Hebrews 9:19](../09/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
744HEB921xa9qπάντα τὰ σκεύη τῆς λειτουργίας1all the containers used in the serviceA container is an object that can hold things. Here it may refer to any kind of utensil or tool. Alternate translation: “all the utensils used in the service”
745HEB921cl3vfigs-metonymyτῷ αἵματι1bloodHere the animal **blood** refers to the animals death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
746HEB922g3effigs-metaphorσχεδὸν ἐν αἵματι πάντα καθαρίζεται1almost everything is cleansed with bloodMaking something acceptable to God is spoken of as if it were cleansing that thing. Alternate translation: “almost everything is made acceptable to God by being cleansed with blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
747HEB922hi7mfigs-activepassiveσχεδὸν ἐν αἵματι πάντα καθαρίζεται1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the priests use blood to cleanse almost everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
748HEB922v8bjfigs-metonymyχωρὶς αἱματεκχυσίας, οὐ γίνεται ἄφεσις1Without the shedding of blood there is no forgivenessHere, **shedding of blood** refers to something dying as a sacrifice to God. Alternate translation: “without the death of something, there is no forgiveness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
749HEB922uw4gfigs-doublenegativesχωρὶς αἱματεκχυσίας, οὐ γίνεται ἄφεσις1This double negative can mean that all forgiveness comes through the shedding of blood. Alternate translation: “forgiveness only comes when something dies as a sacrifice” or “God only forgives when something dies as a sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
750HEB922v1trfigs-explicitἄφεσις1forgivenessYou can state explicitly the implied meaning. Alternate translation: “forgiveness of the sins of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
751HEB923nh150Connecting Statement:The writer emphasizes that Christ (now in heaven interceding for us) had to die only once for sins and that he will return to earth a second time.
752HEB923q79nfigs-activepassiveἀνάγκη…τὰ μὲν ὑποδείγματα τῶν ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς τούτοις καθαρίζεσθαι1the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrificesIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the priests must use these animal sacrifices to cleanse what are copies of things that are in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
753HEB923y9b7figs-activepassiveαὐτὰ δὲ τὰ ἐπουράνια κρείττοσι θυσίαις παρὰ ταύτας1the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrificesThat is, the **sacrifices** to cleanse the **heavenly things** are better than the sacrifices used to cleanse the earthly copies. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as for the heavenly things themselves, God had to cleanse them with much better sacrifices” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
754HEB924cy2xfigs-synecdocheχειροποίητα…ἅγια1the most holy place made with hands, whichHere, **with hands** means “by humans.” Alternate translation: “the most holy place made by humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
755HEB924akiifigs-activepassiveχειροποίητα…ἅγια1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the most holy place, which humans made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
756HEB924g5lpτῶν ἀληθινῶν1of the true oneAlternate translation: “of the true most holy place”
757HEB925f17aοὐδ’1He did not go thereAlternate translation: “And he did not enter heaven”
758HEB925zpf3ἐν αἵματι ἀλλοτρίῳ1with the blood of anotherThis means with the **blood** of an animal victim, not with his own blood.
759HEB926lhi3ἐπεὶ1If that had been the caseAlternate translation: “since if he had to offer himself often,”
760HEB926dq7mfigs-metaphorεἰς ἀθέτησιν ἁμαρτίας διὰ τῆς θυσίας αὐτοῦ1to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himselfDoing away with **sin** represents having God forgive it. Alternate translation: “to cause God to forgive sins by sacrificing himself” or “to sacrifice himself so that God can forgive sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
761HEB928p8b6figs-activepassiveὁ Χριστός ἅπαξ προσενεχθεὶς1Christ was offered onceIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Christ offered himself once” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
762HEB928hv2tfigs-metaphorεἰς τὸ…ἀνενεγκεῖν ἁμαρτίας1to take away the sinsThe act of making us innocent rather than guilty for our sins is spoken of as if our **sins** were physical objects that Christ could carry away from us. Alternate translation: “so that God would forgive the sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
763HEB928p6thfigs-metonymyτὸ…ἁμαρτίας1the sinsHere, **sins** mean the guilt that people have before God because of the sins they committed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
764HEB10intronev10# Hebrews 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, the writer finishes describing how Jesus sacrifice was better than the sacrifices offered in the Temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 10:5-7, 15-17, 37-38, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Gods judgment and reward<br><br>Holy living is important for Christians. God will hold people accountable for how they lived their Christian life. Even though there will not be eternal condemnation for Christians, ungodly actions do and will have consequences. In addition, faithful living will be rewarded. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins”<br><br>The sacrifices themselves had no redeeming power. They were effective because they were a display of faith, which was credited to the person offering the sacrifice. It was ultimately the sacrifice of Jesus which then makes these sacrifices “take away sins.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/redeem]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])<br><br>### “The covenant that I will make”<br><br>It is unclear whether this prophecy was being fulfilled as the author was writing or whether it was to occur later. The translator should try to avoid making a claim about the time this covenant begins. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
765HEB101kwq10Connecting Statement:The writer shows the weakness of the law and its sacrifices, why God gave the law, and the perfection of the new priesthood and Christs sacrifice.
766HEB101kj83figs-metaphorσκιὰν…ἔχων ὁ νόμος τῶν μελλόντων ἀγαθῶν1the law is only a shadow of the good things to comeThis speaks about **the law** as if it were a **shadow**. The author means the law is not the **good things** that God had promised. It only hints at the good things that God is going to do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
767HEB101r6lyοὐκ αὐτὴν τὴν εἰκόνα τῶν πραγμάτων1not the real forms of those things themselvesAlternate translation: “not the real things themselves”
768HEB102aw6gfigs-rquestionοὐκ ἂν ἐπαύσαντο προσφερόμεναι, διὰ τὸ μηδεμίαν ἔχειν ἔτι συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν, τοὺς λατρεύοντας ἅπαξ κεκαθαρισμένους?1would the sacrifices not have ceased to be offered?The author uses a question to state that the sacrifices were limited in their power. Alternate translation: “they would have ceased being offered because no one would still have consciousness of sins, those who worship having been cleansed once for all.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
769HEB102xor4figs-activepassiveοὐκ ἂν ἐπαύσαντο προσφερόμεναι1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they would have ceased offering those sacrifices” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
770HEB102mu42figs-metaphorτοὺς λατρεύοντας ἅπαξ κεκαθαρισμένους1the worshipers would have been cleansedHere **having been cleansed** represents no longer being guilty of sin. Alternate translation: “those who worship no longer being guilty of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
771HEB102vzcgfigs-activepassiveτοὺς λατρεύοντας ἅπαξ κεκαθαρισμένους1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the sacrifices would have taken away their sin” or “God would have made them no longer guilty of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
772HEB102m9tjτὸ μηδεμίαν ἔχειν ἔτι συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν1would no longer have any consciousness of sinAlternate translation: “they would no longer think that they are guilty of sin” or “would know that they are no longer guilty of sin”
773HEB104di8ifigs-metaphorἀδύνατον γὰρ αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων ἀφαιρεῖν ἁμαρτίας1For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sinsHere, **sins** are spoken of as if they were objects that animal **blood** could sweep away as it flowed. Alternate translation: “For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to cause God to forgive sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
774HEB104bvu5figs-metonymyαἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων1the blood of bulls and goatsHere, **blood** refers to these animals dying as sacrifices to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
775HEB105q4ye0General Information:Christs words when he was on earth were foretold in this quotation from a psalm of David.
776HEB105ml8efigs-youοὐκ ἠθέλησας1you did not desireHere, **you** is singular and refers to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
777HEB107zn6cτότε εἶπον1Then I saidHere, **I** refers to Christ.
778HEB108c8eb0General Information:Though changing the wording slightly, the author repeats these quotations from a psalm of David for emphasis.
779HEB108rlv8θυσίας…προσφορὰς1sacrifices … offeringsSee how you translated the words **Sacrifices** and **offerings** in [Hebrews 10:5](../10/05.md).
780HEB108n7kcὁλοκαυτώματα…περὶ ἁμαρτίας1whole burnt offerings … sacrifices for sinSee how you translated **whole burnt offerings** and **sin offerings** in [Hebrews 10:6](../10/06.md).
781HEB108d3ekfigs-activepassiveαἵτινες…προσφέρονται1that are offeredIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that priests offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
782HEB109k5kvἰδοὺ1SeeAlternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you”
783HEB109rxtbfigs-metaphorἀναιρεῖ τὸ πρῶτον, ἵνα τὸ δεύτερον στήσῃ1Stopping the **first practice** is spoken of as if it were an object that could be taken away. Starting the **second practice** is spoken of as establishing that practice. Alternate translation: “He stops people atoning for sins the first way in order to atone for sins the second way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
784HEB109ja8ntranslate-ordinalτὸ πρῶτον…τὸ δεύτερον1first practice … the second practiceThe words **first** and **second** are ordinal numbers. Alternate translation: “the old practice … the new practice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
785HEB1010xj9ifigs-activepassiveἡγιασμένοι ἐσμὲν1we have been sanctifiedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has sanctified us” or “God has dedicated us to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
786HEB1010xk24figs-abstractnounsδιὰ τῆς προσφορᾶς τοῦ σώματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ1through the offering of the body of Jesus ChristThe abstract noun **offering** can be expressed with the verb “offer” or “sacrifice.” Alternate translation: “because Jesus Christ offered his body as a sacrifice” or “because Jesus Christ sacrificed his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
787HEB1011jq4ifigs-metaphorοὐδέποτε δύνανται περιελεῖν ἁμαρτίας1can never take away sinsThis speaks of **sins** as if they are objects that a person can **take away**. Alternate translation: “can never cause God to forgive sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
788HEB1012fy8wtranslate-symactionἐκάθισεν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ1he sat down at the right hand of GodTo sit at the **right hand of God** is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Hebrews 1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “he sat down at the place of honor and authority beside God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
789HEB1013s6snfigs-metaphorἕως τεθῶσιν οἱ ἐχθροὶ αὐτοῦ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ1until his enemies are made a stool for his feetThe humiliation of Christs **enemies** is spoken of as if they were made a place for him to rest **his feet**. Alternate translation: “until God humiliates Christs enemies and they become like a stool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
790HEB1013qnbyfigs-activepassiveἕως τεθῶσιν οἱ ἐχθροὶ αὐτοῦ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until God makes Christs enemies like a stool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
791HEB1014dz9nfigs-activepassiveτοὺς ἁγιαζομένους1those who are being sanctifiedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom God is sanctifying” or “those whom God has dedicated to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
792HEB1015qk8j0General Information:This is a quotation from the prophet Jeremiah in the Old Testament.
793HEB1016czh3πρὸς αὐτοὺς1with themAlternate translation: “with my people”
794HEB1016s783μετὰ τὰς ἡμέρας ἐκείνας1after those daysAlternate translation: “when the time of the first covenant with my people has finished”
795HEB1016xx53figs-metonymyδιδοὺς νόμους μου ἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν1I will put my laws in their heartsHere, **hearts** is a metonym for a persons inner being. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
796HEB1016hpn5figs-metaphorδιδοὺς νόμους μου ἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν1The phrase **put them in their hearts** is a metaphor for enabling people to obey the law. Alternate translation: “I will enable them to obey my laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
797HEB1017vkw40General Information:This continues the quotation from the prophet Jeremiah in the Old Testament.
798HEB1017qn7wτῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν, καὶ τῶν ἀνομιῶν αὐτῶν, οὐ μὴ μνησθήσομαι ἔτι1Their sins and lawless deeds I will remember no longer.”This is the second part of the Holy Spirits testimony ([Hebrews 10:15-16](./15.md)).
799HEB1017pql9figs-doubletτῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν, καὶ τῶν ἀνομιῶν αὐτῶν1Their sins and lawless deedsThe words **sins** and **lawless deeds** mean basically the same thing. Together they emphasize how bad the sin is. Alternate translation: “The things they did that were forbidden and how they broke the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
800HEB1018pje1δὲ1Now**Now** is used to draw attention to the important point that follows. It does not mean “at this moment.”
801HEB1018pjh5figs-abstractnounsὅπου…ἄφεσις τούτων1where there is forgiveness for theseYou can reword this to express the abstract noun **forgiveness** with the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “when God has forgiven these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
802HEB1018z351figs-abstractnounsοὐκέτι προσφορὰ περὶ ἁμαρτίας1there is no longer any sacrifice for sinYou can reword this to express the abstract noun **sacrifice** with the verb “make offerings.” Alternate translation: “people no longer need to make offerings for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
803HEB1019ih5u0Connecting Statement:Having made it clear that there is only one sacrifice for sin, the writer continues with the picture of the most holy place in the temple, where only the high priest could enter each year with the blood of the sacrifice for sins. He reminds the believers that they now worship God in his presence as if they were standing in the most holy place.
804HEB1019f6g3figs-metaphorἀδελφοί1brothersHere, **brothers** refers to all believers in Christ whether male or female. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
805HEB1019fii7figs-metaphorτῶν ἁγίων1the most holy placeHere, **the holy place** refers to the presence of God, not the most holy place in the old tabernacle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
806HEB1019zl87figs-metonymyἐν τῷ αἵματι Ἰησοῦ1by the blood of JesusHere, **blood of Jesus** refers to the death of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
807HEB1020l7whὁδὸν πρόσφατον καὶ ζῶσαν1living wayThis could mean: (1) the **new** **way** to God that Jesus has provided results in believers **living** forever. (2) Jesus is alive, and he is the **way** believers enter into the presence of God.
808HEB1020c3vefigs-metaphorδιὰ τοῦ καταπετάσματος1through the curtainThe **curtain** in the earthly temple represented the separation between people and Gods true presence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
809HEB1020ega9figs-metonymyτῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ1his fleshHere, **flesh** stands for the body of Jesus, and his body stands for his sacrificial death. Alternate translation: “by means of his death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
810HEB1021uh6iκαὶ ἱερέα μέγαν ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ1we have a great priest over the house of GodThis must be translated in such a way as to make it clear that Jesus is this **great priest**.
811HEB1021bmh1ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον1over the houseAlternate translation: “in charge of the house”
812HEB1021d1u1figs-metaphorτὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ1the house of GodThis speaks about Gods people as if they were a literal **house** for him. Alternate translation: “all the people of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
813HEB1022l4ikfigs-metonymyπροσερχώμεθα1let us approachHere, **approach** stands for worshiping God, as a priest would go up to Gods altar to sacrifice animals to him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
814HEB1022wez1figs-metonymyμετὰ ἀληθινῆς καρδίας1with true heartsHere, **true hearts** stands for the genuine will and motivation of the believers. Alternate translation: “with sincerity” or “with sincerely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
815HEB1022i7tiἐν πληροφορίᾳ πίστεως1in the full assurance of faithAlternate translation: “and with a confident faith” or “and trusting completely in Jesus”
816HEB1022zkg5figs-activepassiveῥεραντισμένοι τὰς καρδίας1having our hearts sprinkled cleanIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as if had he made our hearts clean with his blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
817HEB1022w775figs-metonymyῥεραντισμένοι τὰς καρδίας1hearts sprinkled cleanHere, **hearts** is a metonym for the conscience, the awareness of right and wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
818HEB1022oa1sfigs-metaphorῥεραντισμένοι τὰς καρδίας1Being made **clean** is a metaphor for being forgiven and being given the status of righteousness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
819HEB1022pc1atranslate-symactionῥεραντισμένοι1sprinkledSprinkling was a symbolic action done by the priests by which they applied the benefits of the covenant to people and to objects. See how you translated this in [Hebrews 9:19](../09/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
820HEB1022p2skfigs-activepassiveλελουμένοι τὸ σῶμα ὕδατι καθαρῷ1having our bodies washed with pure waterIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as if he had washed our bodies in pure water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
821HEB1022tk9pfigs-metaphorλελουμένοι τὸ σῶμα ὕδατι καθαρῷ1our bodies washed with pure waterThis **washing** stands for the believer being made acceptable to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
822HEB1022qr4bfigs-metonymyλελουμένοι τὸ σῶμα ὕδατι καθαρῷ1If the translator understands this phrase as referring to Christian baptism, then **water** is literal, not figurative. But if **water** is taken as literal, then **pure** is figurative, standing for the spiritual purity that baptism is said here to accomplish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
823HEB1023k5uifigs-metaphorκατέχωμεν τὴν ὁμολογίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος1Let us also hold tightly to the confession of our hopeHere, **hold tightly** is a metaphor that refers to a person determining to do something and refusing to stop. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
824HEB1023n57ofigs-abstractnounsκατέχωμεν τὴν ὁμολογίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος1You can translate the abstract nouns **confession** and **hope** as verbs. Alternate translation: “Let us be determined to continue confessing the things that we confidently expect from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
825HEB1023jy4tfigs-metaphorἀκλινῆ1without waveringBeing uncertain about something is spoken of as if he were **wavering** or leaning from side to side. Alternate translation: “without being unsure” or “without doubting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
826HEB1025v4fafigs-explicitμὴ ἐγκαταλείποντες τὴν ἐπισυναγωγὴν ἑαυτῶν1Let us not stop meeting togetherYou can make explicit that the people met to worship. Alternate translation: “let us not stop coming together to worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
827HEB1025rqfzfigs-metonymyὅσῳ βλέπετε ἐγγίζουσαν τὴν ἡμέραν1Here, **the day** refers to when Jesus will return. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
828HEB1025k9c7figs-metaphorὅσῳ βλέπετε ἐγγίζουσαν τὴν ἡμέραν1as you see the day coming closerA future time is spoken of as if it were an object coming closer to the speaker. Alternate translation: “as you know that Christ will return soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
829HEB1026gm7l0Connecting Statement:The writer now gives his fourth warning.
830HEB1026byv6ἑκουσίως…ἁμαρτανόντων ἡμῶν1we deliberately go on sinningAlternate translation: “if we know we are sinning but we do it again and again”
831HEB1026hj5sfigs-metaphorμετὰ τὸ λαβεῖν τὴν ἐπίγνωσιν τῆς ἀληθείας1after we have received the knowledge of the truthHere, **knowledge of the truth** is spoken of as if it were an object that could be given by one person to another. Alternate translation: “after we have learned the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
832HEB1026b1r7figs-explicitτῆς ἀληθείας1the truthThis refers to the **truth** about God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
833HEB1026l7svfigs-explicitοὐκέτι περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν ἀπολείπεται θυσία1a sacrifice for sins no longer existsNo one is able to give a new **sacrifice** because Christs sacrifice is the only one that works. Alternate translation: “no one can offer a sacrifice for which God will forgive our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
834HEB1026sil4περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν…θυσία1a sacrifice for sinsHere, **sacrifice for sins** stands for “an effective way to sacrifice animals to take away sins”
835HEB1027fza4figs-explicitκρίσεως1of judgmentHere, **judgment**, refers to when God will judge. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
836HEB1027t6dafigs-metaphorπυρὸς ζῆλος ἐσθίειν μέλλοντος τοὺς ὑπεναντίους1a fury of fire that will consume Gods enemiesGods **zeal** is spoken of as if it were fire that would burn up his **enemies**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
837HEB1028c1ajfigs-explicitδυσὶν ἢ τρισὶν μάρτυσιν1two or three witnessesIt is implied that this means “of at least two or three witness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
838HEB1029gv5zfigs-exclamationsπόσῳ δοκεῖτε χείρονος, ἀξιωθήσεται τιμωρίας, ὁ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταπατήσας, καὶ τὸ αἷμα τῆς διαθήκης κοινὸν ἡγησάμενος, ἐν ᾧ ἡγιάσθη, καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς χάριτος ἐνυβρίσας!1How much worse punishment do you think one deserves … grace?The author is emphasizing the greatness of the **punishment** for those who reject Christ. Alternate translation: “This was severe punishment. But the punishment will be even greater for anyone who has trampled underfoot the Son of God, and has considered the blood of the covenant—by which he was sanctified—{as} profane, and has insulted the Spirit of grace!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
839HEB1029jd69figs-metaphorτὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταπατήσας1has trampled underfoot the Son of GodDisregarding Christ and scorning him are spoken of as if someone had walked on him. Alternate translation: “has rejected the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
840HEB1029d2z9guidelines-sonofgodprinciplesτὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ1the Son of God**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
841HEB1029m7lwτὸ αἷμα τῆς διαθήκης κοινὸν ἡγησάμενος1who treated the blood of the covenant as unholyThis shows how the person has trampled the Son of God. Alternate translation: “treated the blood of the covenant … as unholy”
842HEB1029el74figs-metonymyτὸ αἷμα τῆς διαθήκης1the blood of the covenantHere, **blood** stands for Christs death, by which God established the new **covenant**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
843HEB1029wj2pfigs-activepassiveτὸ αἷμα τῆς διαθήκης κοινὸν…ἐν ᾧ ἡγιάσθη1the blood by which he was sanctifiedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the blood by which God sanctified him as profane” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
844HEB1029qr6cτὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς χάριτος1the Spirit of graceAlternate translation: “the Spirit of God, who provides grace”
845HEB1030ynr1figs-exclusiveοἴδαμεν1The word **we** here refers to the writer and all believers. These two quotations come from the law that Moses gave in the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
846HEB1030vub5ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω…κρινεῖ Κύριος τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ1These two quotations come from the law that Moses gave in the Old Testament.
847HEB1030v8adfigs-metaphorἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις1Vengeance belongs to me**Vengeance** is spoken of as if it were an object that belongs to God, who has the right to do as he wishes with what he owns. God has the right to take vengeance on his enemies. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
848HEB1030pdw9figs-metaphorἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω1I will pay backGod taking vengeance is spoken of as if he were paying back the harmful things that someone has done to others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
849HEB1031hhu7figs-metaphorτὸ ἐμπεσεῖν εἰς χεῖρας1to fall into the handsReceiving Gods full punishment is spoken of as if the person were **to fall** into Gods **hands**. Alternate translation: “to receive the full punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
850HEB1031mr1pfigs-metonymyτὸ ἐμπεσεῖν εἰς χεῖρας1Here, **hands** refers to Gods power to judge. Alternate translation: “into the judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
851HEB1032tlh3τὰς πρότερον ἡμέρας1the former daysAlternate translation: “the time in the past”
852HEB1032p3q3figs-metaphorφωτισθέντες1after you were enlightenedLearning the truth is spoken of as if God shined a light on the person. Alternate translation: “after you had learned the truth about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
853HEB1032ami9figs-activepassiveφωτισθέντες1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after God had shown you the truth about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
854HEB1033cig1figs-activepassiveὀνειδισμοῖς τε καὶ θλίψεσιν θεατριζόμενοι1You were exposed to public ridicule by insults and persecutionIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people ridiculed you both by insulting and by persecuting you in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
855HEB1033u1gkκοινωνοὶ τῶν…γενηθέντες1you were sharing with thoseAlternate translation: “you joined those”
856HEB1034cjr6figs-metaphorκρείσσονα ὕπαρξιν, καὶ μένουσαν1a better and everlasting possessionGods eternal blessings are spoken of as a **possession**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
857HEB1035xh640General Information:In 10:37 is a quotation from the prophet Isaiah in the Old Testament.
858HEB1035m35cfigs-metaphorμὴ ἀποβάλητε οὖν τὴν παρρησίαν ὑμῶν, ἥτις ἔχει μεγάλην μισθαποδοσίαν1do not throw away your confidence, which has a great rewardA person no longer having **confidence** is spoken of as if the person were to **throw away** his confidence, like a person would discard something worthless. Alternate translation: “do not stop being confident, because you will receive a great reward for being confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
859HEB1035bksdfigs-abstractnounsμὴ ἀποβάλητε οὖν τὴν παρρησίαν ὑμῶν, ἥτις ἔχει μεγάλην μισθαποδοσίαν1You can translate the abstract noun **confidence** with the adjective “confident” or the adverb “confidently.” Alternate translation: “do not stop confidently trusting in God, who will reward you greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
860HEB1037st8vfigs-explicitἔτι γὰρ μικρὸν ὅσον, ὅσον1For in a very little whileYou can make explicit who is speaking. Alternate translation: “As God said in the scriptures, For in a very little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
861HEB1037cna2ἔτι…μικρὸν ὅσον, ὅσον1in a very little whileAlternate translation: “very soon”
862HEB1038j2ck0General Information:In 10:38 the author quotes from the prophet Habakkuk, which directly follows the quotation from the prophet Isaiah in 10:37.
863HEB1038j6d1figs-genericnounὁ…δίκαιός μου…ἐὰν ὑποστείληται…ἐν αὐτῷ1My righteous one … If he shrinks … with himHere, **my righteous one**, **he**, and **him** refer to any of Gods people in general. Alternate translation: “my faithful people … If any one of them shrinks … with that person” or “my faithful people … If they shrink … with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
864HEB1038r8mhὁ…ψυχή μου1My righteous … I willHere, both occurrences of **my** refer to God.
865HEB1039i9zhfigs-metaphorὑποστολῆς εἰς ἀπώλειαν1who turn back to destructionA person who loses courage and faith are spoken of as if he were stepping back in fear from something. And **destruction** is spoken of as if it were a destination. Alternate translation: “who stop trusting God, which will cause him to destroy us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
866HEB1039dv8yfigs-metaphorεἰς περιποίησιν ψυχῆς1for keeping our soulLiving eternally with God is spoken of as if it were keeping ones **soul**. Alternate translation: “so that his soul will live with God forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
867HEB1039hm0mfigs-synecdocheεἰς περιποίησιν ψυχῆς1Here, **soul** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “so that he will live with God forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
868HEB11introg4cc0# Hebrews 11 General Notes<br><br>## Structure<br><br>The writer begins this chapter by telling what faith is. Then he gives many examples of people who had faith and how they lived.<br><br>## Important concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Faith<br><br>In both the old and new covenants, God required faith. Some people with faith performed miracles and were very powerful. Other people with faith suffered greatly.
869HEB111a3710Connecting Statement:The author tells three things about faith in this brief introduction.
870HEB111d95iδὲ1Now**Now** is used here to mark a break in the main teaching. Here the author starts to explain the meaning of “faith.”
871HEB111dne9ἔστιν…πίστις ἐλπιζομένων ὑπόστασις1faith is being sure of the things hoped forIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when we have faith, we are sure of the things we hope for” or “faith is what allows a person to confidently expect certain things”
872HEB111hiq2ἐλπιζομένων1hoped forHere **things being hoped for** refers specifically to the sure promises of God, especially the certainty that all believers in Jesus will live with God forever in heaven.
873HEB111ybd8figs-activepassiveπραγμάτων ἔλεγχος οὐ βλεπομένων1certain of things that are not seenIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “proof of what we still have not seen” or “proof of what still have not happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
874HEB112smr4ἐν ταύτῃ γὰρ1For because of thisAlternate translation: “Because they were certain about events that had not happened”
875HEB112kmq6figs-activepassiveἐμαρτυρήθησαν οἱ πρεσβύτεροι1the ancestors were approvedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God approved of our ancestors because they had faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
876HEB112u66cfigs-explicitοἱ πρεσβύτεροι1the ancestorsThe author is speaking to the Hebrews about their Hebrew ancestors. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
877HEB113u5i9figs-activepassiveκατηρτίσθαι τοὺς αἰῶνας ῥήματι Θεοῦ1the universe was created by Gods commandIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God created the universe by commanding it to exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
878HEB113e7fsτὸ μὴ ἐκ φαινομένων, τὸ βλεπόμενον γεγονέναι1what is visible was not made out of things that were visibleIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God did not create what we see out of things that were visible”
879HEB114w5de0Connecting Statement:The writer then gives many examples (mostly from Old Testament writings) of people who lived by faith even though they did not receive what God had promised while they lived on the earth.
880HEB114r2m8figs-activepassiveἐμαρτυρήθη εἶναι δίκαιος1he was attested to be righteousIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God declared him to be righteous” or “God declared that Abel was righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
881HEB114g52jfigs-metaphorἔτι λαλεῖ1Abel still speaksReading the scriptures and learning about Abels faith is spoken of as if Abel himself were still speaking. Alternate translation: “we still learn from what Abel did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
882HEB115r3ylfigs-activepassiveπίστει Ἑνὼχ μετετέθη, τοῦ μὴ ἰδεῖν θάνατον1It was by faith that Enoch was taken up so that he did not see deathIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “It was by faith that Enoch did not die because God took him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
883HEB115ki2tfigs-metaphorἰδεῖν θάνατον1see deathThis speaks of **death** as if it were an object that people can see. It means to experience death. Alternate translation: “dying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
884HEB115kb5lfigs-activepassiveπρὸ…τῆς μεταθέσεως1before he was taken upIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “before God took him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
885HEB115jbx2figs-activepassiveμεμαρτύρηται εὐηρεστηκέναι τῷ Θεῷ1it was testified that he had pleased GodIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God said that Enoch had pleased him. (2) people said that Enoch pleased God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
886HEB116hd94χωρὶς δὲ πίστεως1Now without faith**Now** does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
887HEB116r9nbfigs-doublenegativesχωρὶς…πίστεως, ἀδύνατον εὐαρεστῆσαι1without faith it is impossible to please himYou can state the double negative **without … impossible** in positive form. Alternate translation: “a person can please God only if he has faith in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
888HEB116b438figs-metaphorτὸν προσερχόμενον τῷ Θεῷ1that anyone coming to GodWanting to worship God and belong to his people is spoken of as if the person is literally coming **to God**. Alternate translation: “that anyone who wants to belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
889HEB116xl5vτοῖς ἐκζητοῦσιν…μισθαποδότης γίνεται1he is a rewarder of thoseAlternate translation: “he rewards those who seek”
890HEB116i8e9figs-metaphorτοῖς ἐκζητοῦσιν αὐτὸν1those who seek himPeople who learn about God and make an effort to obey him are spoken of as if they were seeking to find him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
891HEB117r67bfigs-activepassiveχρηματισθεὶς1having been given a divine messageIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “because God told him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
892HEB117p3pnfigs-activepassiveπερὶ τῶν μηδέπω βλεπομένων1about things not yet seenIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “about things no one had ever seen before” or “about events that had not happened yet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
893HEB117pf7bfigs-metonymyτὸν κόσμον1the worldHere, **the world** refers to the worlds human population. Alternate translation: “the people living in the world at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
894HEB117c9ycfigs-metaphorτῆς…δικαιοσύνης, ἐγένετο κληρονόμος1became an heir of the righteousnessNoah receiving **righteousness** is spoken of as if he were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “received from God the righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
895HEB117et9lκατὰ πίστιν1that is according to faithAlternate translation: “that God gives to those who have faith in him”
896HEB118a7c2figs-activepassiveκαλούμενος1when he was calledIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when God called him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
897HEB118kkt5ἐξελθεῖν εἰς τόπον1went out to the placeAlternate translation: “to leave his home to go to the place”
898HEB118d1zffigs-metaphorὃν ἤμελλεν λαμβάνειν εἰς κληρονομίαν1that he was to receive as an inheritanceThe land that God promised to give Abrahams descendants is spoken of as if it were **an inheritance** that Abraham was **going to receive**. Alternate translation: “that God would give him for an inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
899HEB118sq21ἐξῆλθεν1He went outAlternate translation: “he left his home”
900HEB119pmb6figs-abstractnounsπαρῴκησεν εἰς γῆν τῆς ἐπαγγελίας ὡς ἀλλοτρίαν1he lived in the land of promise as a foreignerYou can express the abstract noun **promise** with the verb “promised.” Alternate translation: “he lived as a foreigner in the land God had promised to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
901HEB119s5fwfigs-metaphorτῶν συνκληρονόμων1fellow heirsThis speaks about Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob as if they were **fellow heirs** that would receive an inheritance from their father. Alternate translation: “heirs together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
902HEB1110f3z8figs-metonymyτὴν τοὺς θεμελίους ἔχουσαν πόλιν1the city with foundationsHaving **foundations** indicates that the city is permanent. Alternate translation: “the eternal city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
903HEB1110fd98ἧς τεχνίτης καὶ δημιουργὸς ὁ Θεός1whose architect and builder is GodAlternate translation: “which God designed and built” or “which God would design and build”
904HEB1110ufe6τεχνίτης1architectAn **architect** a person who designs buildings and cities.
905HEB1111mk6iπίστει καὶ αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβεν, καὶ παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας, ἐπεὶ…ἡγήσατο1It was by faith, even though Sarah herself was barren, that Abraham received ability to father a child. This happened even though he was too old, since he consideredThe verbs **received** and **considered** could be either masculine or feminine. Some versions interpret this verse as referring to Abraham. “By faith Abraham, even though Sarah herself was beyond the time of full age, received power to bear children, since he considered”
906HEB1111mtf2figs-abstractnounsπίστει1It was by faithYou can express the abstract noun **faith** with the verb “believe.” This could mean: (1) this happened because of Abrahams faith. Alternate translation: “It was because Abraham believed God” (2) this happened because of Sarahs faith. Alternate translation: “It was because Sarah believed God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
907HEB1111dgu6δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβεν1received ability to father a childAlternate translation: “received ability to become a father” or “received ability to have a child”
908HEB1111wgp6ἐπεὶ πιστὸν ἡγήσατο τὸν ἐπαγγειλάμενον1since she considered as faithful the one who had given the promiseAlternate translation: “because he believed God, who had given the promise, to be faithful”
909HEB1112x8b2figs-simileἐγεννήθησαν…καθὼς τὰ ἄστρα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τῷ πλήθει, καὶ ὡς ἡ ἄμμος, ἡ παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τῆς θαλάσσης, ἡ ἀναρίθμητος1descendants as many as the stars in the sky and as countless as sand by the seashoreThis simile means Abraham had very many descendants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
910HEB1112mu4eὡς ἡ ἄμμος, ἡ παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τῆς θαλάσσης, ἡ ἀναρίθμητος1as countless as sand by the seashoreHere, **countless as the sand along the shore of the sea** means that just as there are so many grains of **sand** on the seashore that no one can count them all, Abraham had so many descendants that no one can count them all.
911HEB1113yin6figs-metaphorμὴ λαβόντες τὰς ἐπαγγελίας1without receiving the promisesThis speaks of **the promises** as if they are objects that a person receives. Alternate translation: “without receiving what God had promised them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
912HEB1113g5utfigs-metaphorπόρρωθεν αὐτὰς ἰδόντες καὶ ἀσπασάμενοι1after seeing and greeting them from far offFuture promised events are spoken of as if they were travelers arriving from far away. Alternate translation: “after learning what God will do in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
913HEB1113n71bὁμολογήσαντες1they admittedAlternate translation: “they acknowledged” or “they accepted”
914HEB1113q1nqfigs-doubletξένοι καὶ παρεπίδημοί εἰσιν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς1they were foreigners and exiles on earthHere, **foreigners** and **exiles** mean basically the same thing. This emphasizes that this earth was not their true home. They were waiting for their true home that God would make for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
915HEB1114xwa4πατρίδα1a homelandAlternate translation: “a country for them to belong to”
916HEB1116ea1aἐπουρανίου1heavenly oneAlternate translation: “a heavenly country” or “a country in heaven”
917HEB1116cvh1figs-activepassiveοὐκ ἐπαισχύνεται αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς, Θεὸς ἐπικαλεῖσθαι αὐτῶν1God is not ashamed to be called their GodYou can express this in active form. Alternate translation: “God is not ashamed that they call him their God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
918HEB1116zfirfigs-litotesοὐκ ἐπαισχύνεται αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς, Θεὸς ἐπικαλεῖσθαι αὐτῶν1The writer expressed this in a negative form to stress that God was proud to be **their God**. You can express this in positive form. Alternate translation: “God is proud to have them say that he is their God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
919HEB1117bk7afigs-activepassiveπειραζόμενος1when he was testedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when God tested him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
920HEB1118wy2jfigs-activepassiveπρὸς ὃν ἐλαλήθη1to whom it had been saidIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God had said to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
921HEB1118c23zfigs-metonymyκληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα1your descendants will be namedHere, **named** means assigned or designated. Alternate translation: “your descendants will be designated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
922HEB1118g294figs-activepassiveκληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I will designate your descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
923HEB1119p43uκαὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγείρειν δυνατὸς ὁ Θεός1God was able to raise up Isaac from the deadAlternate translation: “God was able to cause Isaac to live again”
924HEB1119sar1καὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγείρειν1to raise up … from the deadHere, **to raise up** is to make alive again. The words **from the dead** speak of all dead people together in the underworld.
925HEB1119aea3ἐν παραβολῇ1figuratively speakingHere the phrase **in a parable** means that what the author says next is not to be understood literally. God did not bring Isaac back from death literally. But because Abraham was about to sacrifice Isaac when God stopped him, it was as if God brought him back from the dead. Alternate translation: “in a manner of speaking”
926HEB1119k7u3ὅθεν1from thereAlternate translation: “from the dead”
927HEB1119g19xαὐτὸν…ἐκομίσατο1he received him backAlternate translation: “Abraham received Isaac back”
928HEB1122lkp6figs-euphemismτελευτῶν1when his end was nearHere, **an end** is a polite way of referring to death. Alternate translation: “when he was about to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
929HEB1122hhs3περὶ τῆς ἐξόδου τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἐμνημόνευσεν1spoke of the departure of the children of Israel from EgyptAlternate translation: “spoke of when the children of Israel would leave Egypt”
930HEB1122t6i5τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ1the sons of IsraelAlternate translation: “the Israelites” or “the descendants of Israel”
931HEB1122nl1ifigs-explicitπερὶ τῶν ὀστέων αὐτοῦ ἐνετείλατο1instructed them about his bonesJoseph died while in Egypt. He wanted his people to take **his bones** with them when they left Egypt so they could bury his bones in the land that God promised them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
932HEB1123g2wxfigs-activepassiveΜωϋσῆς, γεννηθεὶς, ἐκρύβη τρίμηνον ὑπὸ τῶν πατέρων αὐτοῦ1Moses, when he was born, was hidden for three months by his parentsIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Moses parents hid him for three months after he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
933HEB1124h5wzμέγας γενόμενος1had grown upAlternate translation: “having become an adult”
934HEB1124mq2xfigs-activepassiveἠρνήσατο λέγεσθαι1refused to be calledIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “refused to allow people to call him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
935HEB1126i9scfigs-abstractnounsτὸν ὀνειδισμὸν τοῦ Χριστοῦ1the disgrace of following ChristYou can reword the abstract noun **reproach** with the verb “disrespect.” Alternate translation: “the experience of people disrespecting him because he did what Christ would want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
936HEB1126t588figs-metaphorἀπέβλεπεν…εἰς τὴν μισθαποδοσίαν1fixing his eyes on his rewardFully concentrating on achieving a goal is spoken of as if a person were staring at an object and refusing to look away. Alternate translation: “doing what he knew would earn him a reward in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
937HEB1127rc43figs-simileτὸν…ἀόρατον ὡς ὁρῶν, ἐκαρτέρησεν2he endured as if he were seeing the one who is invisibleMoses is spoken of as if he saw God, who is invisible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
938HEB1127cc8wτὸν…ἀόρατον2the one who is invisibleAlternate translation: “the one no one can see”
939HEB1128tz7kπεποίηκεν τὸ Πάσχα καὶ τὴν πρόσχυσιν τοῦ αἵματος1he kept the Passover and the sprinkling of the bloodThis was the first **Passover**. Moses kept it by obeying Gods commands concerning the Passover and by commanding the people to obey them every year. Alternate translation: “he commanded the people to obey Gods commands concerning the Passover and to sprinkle blood on their doors” or “he established the Passover and the sprinkling of blood”
940HEB1128bef7figs-explicitτὴν πρόσχυσιν τοῦ αἵματος1the sprinkling of the bloodHere, **the sprinkling of the blood** refers to Gods command to the Israelites to kill a lamb and spread its** blood** on the doorposts of every house where Israelites lived. This would prevent the destroyer from harming their firstborn sons. This was one of the Passover commands. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
941HEB1128bm2ffigs-metonymyμὴ…θίγῃ1should not touchHere, **touch** refers to harming or to killing someone. Alternate translation: “would not harm” or “would not kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
942HEB1129a67hδιέβησαν τὴν Ἐρυθρὰν Θάλασσαν1they passed through the Sea of ReedsAlternate translation: “the Israelites passed through the Sea of Reeds”
943HEB1129hq2yfigs-activepassiveκατεπόθησαν1they were swallowed upIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the water swallowed up the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
944HEB1129kmy8figs-metaphorκατεπόθησαν1they were swallowed upThe Egyptians are spoken of as if an animal **swallowed** them as it would swallow water or food. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians drowned in the water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
945HEB1130lnw4figs-activepassiveκυκλωθέντα ἐπὶ ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας1they had been circled around for seven daysIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Israelites had marched around them for seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
946HEB1131ftc8δεξαμένη τοὺς κατασκόπους μετ’ εἰρήνης1had received the spies in peaceAlternate translation: “who had peacefully received the spies”
947HEB1132rh6yfigs-rquestionτί ἔτι λέγω?1What more can I say?The author uses a question to emphasize that there are many examples that he could have quoted. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “there are many more examples.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
948HEB1132bs7hἐπιλείψει…με…ὁ χρόνος1the time will fail meAlternate translation: “I will not have enough time”
949HEB1132ni55translate-namesΒαράκ1Barak**Barak** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
950HEB1133f3jxοἳ διὰ πίστεως1It was through faithHere, **who** does not mean that each person listed in 11:32 did all the things the author is about to mention. The author means in general these are the kinds of things that those with faith were able to do. Alternate translation: “people like these through faith”
951HEB1133v5w8οἳ διὰ πίστεως κατηγωνίσαντο βασιλείας1they conquered kingdomsHere, **kingdoms** refers to the people who lived in them. Alternate translation: “who through faith defeated the people of foreign kingdoms”
952HEB1133u2sufigs-metonymyἔφραξαν στόματα λεόντων1They stopped the mouths of lionsThe **mouths of the lions** represents the entire lions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
953HEB1133p6srfigs-metaphorἔφραξαν στόματα λεόντων1This phrase begins a list of some of the ways God saved believers from death. Preventing the **lions** from eating them is spoken of as stopping **the mouths** of the lions. Alternate translation: “kept lions from eating them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
954HEB1134u5hcfigs-metonymyἔσβεσαν δύναμιν πυρός1The **power of fire** represents being burned to death by fire. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
955HEB1134j6svfigs-metaphorἔσβεσαν δύναμιν πυρός1extinguished the power of fire, escaped the edge of the swordPreventing **fire** from burning them to death them is spoken of as extinguishing the **power of fire**. Alternate translation: “prevented fire from burning them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
956HEB1134ppf8figs-metonymyἔφυγον στόματα μαχαίρης1The **edge of the sword** represents the entire sword and its ability to kill. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
957HEB1134uqnffigs-metaphorἔφυγον στόματα μαχαίρης1Avoiding being killed by **the sword** is spoken of as escaping the **edge of the sword**. Alternate translation: “avoided being killed by the sword” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
958HEB1134iri4figs-activepassiveἐδυναμώθησαν ἀπὸ ἀσθενείας1were healed of illnessesIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “received healing from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
959HEB1135t9spfigs-abstractnounsἔλαβον γυναῖκες ἐξ ἀναστάσεως τοὺς νεκροὺς αὐτῶν1Women received back their dead by resurrectionYou can state the abstract noun **resurrection** with a verb. Alternate translation: “Women received their dead back alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
960HEB1135av6cfigs-nominaladjἔλαβον γυναῖκες ἐξ ἀναστάσεως τοὺς νεκροὺς αὐτῶν1The word **dead** is a nominal adjective. You can state this as a verb. Alternate translation: “Women received back alive those who had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
961HEB1135ne1ufigs-explicitἄλλοι δὲ ἐτυμπανίσθησαν, οὐ προσδεξάμενοι τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν1Others were tortured, not accepting releaseIt is implied that their enemies would have released them from prison under certain conditions. Alternate translation: “but others were tortured rather than denying their faith in order to be released from prison” or “but others were tortured rather than doing what their enemies required of them in order to release them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
962HEB1135j37hfigs-activepassiveἄλλοι δὲ ἐτυμπανίσθησαν, οὐ προσδεξάμενοι τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “but others accepted torture rather than release from prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
963HEB1135jyw7κρείττονος ἀναστάσεως1a better resurrectionThis could mean: (1) these people will experience a **better** life in heaven than what they experienced in this world. (2) these people will have a **better resurrection** than those who did not have faith. Those with faith will live forever with God. Those without faith will live forever separated from God.
964HEB1136e9alfigs-activepassiveἕτεροι…ἐμπαιγμῶν καὶ μαστίγων πεῖραν ἔλαβον1Others had testing in mocking and whippingsIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people mocked and whipped others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
965HEB1136nx7ufigs-abstractnounsἕτεροι…ἐμπαιγμῶν καὶ μαστίγων πεῖραν ἔλαβον, ἔτι δὲ δεσμῶν καὶ φυλακῆς1Others had testing in mocking and whippings, and even chains and imprisonmentYou can express the abstract nouns **mocking**, **whippings**, and **imprisonment** with verbs. Alternate translation: “God tested others by allowing their enemies to mock and whip them and even put them in chains and imprison them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
966HEB1137fg8cfigs-activepassiveἐλιθάσθησαν, ἐπρίσθησαν, ἐπειράσθησαν, ἐν φόνῳ μαχαίρης ἀπέθανον1They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were killed with the swordIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “People threw stones at others and sawed others in two and killed others with the sword” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
967HEB1137r3gxπεριῆλθον1went aboutAlternate translation: “they went from place to place” or “they lived all the time”
968HEB1137qf89ἐν μηλωταῖς, ἐν αἰγίοις δέρμασιν1in sheepskins and goatskinsAlternate translation: “wearing only the skins of sheep and goats”
969HEB1137x2jfὑστερούμενοι1destituteAlternate translation: “having nothing” or “being very poor”
970HEB1138a721figs-metonymyοὐκ ἦν ἄξιος ὁ κόσμος1The world was not worthyHere, **the world** refers to the people who lived in the world. Alternate translation: “the people of this world were not worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
971HEB1138j9lpπλανώμενοι1They wandered aboutThey wandered about because they had no place to live.
972HEB1139l5wdfigs-activepassiveοὗτοι πάντες μαρτυρηθέντες διὰ τῆς πίστεως, οὐκ ἐκομίσαντο τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν1Although all these people were approved by God because of their faith, they did not receive the promiseIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God honored all these because of their faith, but they did not themselves receive what God had promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
973HEB1139vgw2figs-metonymyτὴν ἐπαγγελίαν1the promiseHere, **the promise** stands for “what God had promised them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
974HEB1140p9uufigs-activepassiveἵνα μὴ χωρὶς ἡμῶν τελειωθῶσιν1so that without us, they would not be made perfectIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “in order that God not would perfect them without also perfecting us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
975HEB1140nkcifigs-doublenegativesἵνα μὴ χωρὶς ἡμῶν τελειωθῶσιν1You can state the double negative **without … not** in positive form. Alternate translation: “in order that God would perfect both us and them together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
976HEB12introh1qb0# Hebrews 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>After telling of the value discipline, the author begins a series of exhortations. (See; [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/exhort]])<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:5-6, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Discipline<br><br>God wants his people to do what is right. When they do what is wrong, he needs to correct or punish them. He does this just as earthly fathers correct and punish children whom they love. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])
977HEB121jg6wfigs-exclusiveἡμεῖς…ἡμῖν…τρέχωμεν…ἡμῖν1The word **we** and each occurrence of **us** refers to the author and his readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
978HEB121k8mr0Connecting Statement:Because of this great number of Old Testament believers, the author talks of the life of faith that believers should live with Jesus as their example.
979HEB121f6u9figs-metaphorκαὶ ἡμεῖς, τοσοῦτον ἔχοντες περικείμενον ἡμῖν νέφος μαρτύρων1we are surrounded by such a large cloud of witnessesThe writer speaks about the Old Testament believers as if they were a **cloud** that surrounded the present-day believers. Alternate translation: “since there are so many examples of faithful people about whom we learn in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
980HEB121hf97μαρτύρων1witnessesHere, **witnesses** refers to the Old Testament believers in chapter 11 who lived faithful lives previously.
981HEB121yw1tfigs-metaphorὄγκον ἀποθέμενοι πάντα καὶ τὴν εὐπερίστατον ἁμαρτίαν1let us lay aside every weight and easily entangling sinHere, **every weight** and **the easily entangling sin** are spoken of as if a person could take them off himself and put them down. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
982HEB121zln7figs-metaphorὄγκον…πάντα1every weightAttitudes or habits that keep believers from trusting and obeying God are spoken of as if they were loads that would make it difficult for a person to carry while running. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
983HEB121t6wufigs-metaphorτὴν εὐπερίστατον ἁμαρτίαν1easily entangling sinHere, **sin** is spoken of as if it were a net or something else that can trip people up and make them fall. Alternate translation: “sin that makes obeying God difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
984HEB121g5dnfigs-metaphorδι’ ὑπομονῆς, τρέχωμεν τὸν προκείμενον ἡμῖν ἀγῶνα1Let us patiently run the race that is placed before usFollowing Jesus is spoken of as if it were running a **race**. Alternate translation: “let us continue obeying what God has commanded us, just like a runner keeps going until the race is over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
985HEB122a946τὸν τῆς πίστεως ἀρχηγὸν καὶ τελειωτὴν1the founder and perfecter of the faithJesus gives us faith and makes our faith perfect by causing us to reach our goal. Alternate translation: “the creator and finisher of our faith” or “the one who enables us to have faith from beginning to end”
986HEB122za14figs-metaphorἀντὶ τῆς προκειμένης αὐτῷ χαρᾶς1For the joy that was placed before himThe **joy** that Jesus would experience is spoken of as if God the Father had **placed** it **before him** as a goal to reach. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
987HEB122y7meαἰσχύνης καταφρονήσας1despised its shameThis means Jesus hated the **shame** of dying on a cross, even though he allowed that to happen.
988HEB122vm9btranslate-symactionἐν δεξιᾷ τε τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ Θεοῦ κεκάθικεν1sat down at the right hand of the throne of GodTo sit at the **right hand** of God is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Hebrews 1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “and sat down at the place of honor and authority beside the throne of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
989HEB123fsosfigs-exclusiveμὴ κάμητε, ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν ἐκλυόμενοι1The words **you** and **your** are plural and here refer to the readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
990HEB123i1xlfigs-metonymyταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν1weary in your heartsHere, **souls** represents a persons thoughts and emotions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
991HEB124b9b7figs-personificationοὔπω…ἀντικατέστητε, πρὸς τὴν ἁμαρτίαν ἀνταγωνιζόμενοι1You have not yet resisted or struggled against sinHere, **sin** is spoken of as if it were a person against whom someone fights in a battle. Alternate translation: “You have not yet bled from resisting the attacks of sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
992HEB124i4ipfigs-metaphorμέχρις αἵματος1to the point of bloodResisting opposition so much that one dies for it is spoken of as if one reached a certain place where he would die. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
993HEB124uwg6figs-metonymyαἵματος1of bloodHere, **blood** refers to death. Alternate translation: “of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
994HEB125y6cvfigs-personificationτῆς παρακλήσεως, ἥτις ὑμῖν…διαλέγεται1the encouragement that instructs youOld Testament scripture is spoken of as if it were a person who could exhort others. Alternate translation: “what God has instructed you in the scriptures to exhort you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
995HEB125e6a9figs-gendernotationsὡς υἱοῖς…υἱέ μου1as sons … My sonThe word translated **sons** and **son** is specifically the word for a male child. In that culture the family line continued through the sons, not normally through the daughters. However, as stated by the UST and some English versions, the author is directing his words to both males and females. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
996HEB125a7vfυἱέ μου, μὴ ὀλιγώρει παιδείας Κυρίου, μηδὲ ἐκλύου ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐλεγχόμενος1My son … corrected by himHere the author is quoting from the book of Proverbs in the Old Testament, which was the words of Solomon to his male children.
997HEB125cxe9figs-litotesμὴ ὀλιγώρει παιδείας Κυρίου, μηδὲ ἐκλύου1do not think lightly of the Lords discipline, nor grow wearyYou can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “take it very seriously when the Lord disciplines you, and remain encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
998HEB125i1a6figs-activepassiveὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐλεγχόμενος1you are corrected by himIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when he corrects you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
999HEB126zu3cπάντα υἱὸν ὃν παραδέχεται1every son whom he receivesThe word translated **son** is specifically the word for a male child. In that culture the family line continued through the sons, not normally through the daughters. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
1000HEB127v1gufigs-simileὡς υἱοῖς ὑμῖν προσφέρεται ὁ Θεός1God deals with you as with sonsThis compares God disciplining his people to a father disciplining his **sons**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1001HEB127upgqfigs-ellipsisὡς υἱοῖς ὑμῖν προσφέρεται ὁ Θεός1You can state clearly the understood information. Alternate translation: “God deals with you the same way a father deals with his sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1002HEB127i3k4figs-gendernotationsυἱοῖς…υἱὸς1sons … sonYou can translate **sons** and **son** to include males and females. Alternate translation: “to children … child is there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1003HEB127jb38figs-rquestionτίς γὰρ υἱὸς ὃν οὐ παιδεύει πατήρ?1what son is there whom his father does not discipline?The author makes the point through this question that every good **father** disciplines his children. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “For every good father disciplines his children!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1004HEB128kwc6figs-abstractnounsεἰ δὲ χωρίς ἐστε παιδείας, ἧς μέτοχοι γεγόνασι πάντες1But if you are without discipline, which all people share inYou can restate the abstract noun **discipline** with the verb “disciplining.” Alternate translation: “So if you have not experienced God disciplining you like he disciplines all his children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1005HEB128s5u9figs-metaphorἄρα νόθοι καὶ οὐχ υἱοί ἐστε1then you are illegitimate and not his sonsThose whom God does not discipline are spoken of as if they are **sons** born to a man and a woman who are not married each other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1006HEB129r4lbfigs-rquestionοὐ πολὺ…μᾶλλον ὑποταγησόμεθα τῷ Πατρὶ τῶν πνευμάτων, καὶ ζήσομεν?1How much more should we submit to the Father of spirits and live!The author uses a question to emphasize that we should obey God **the Father**. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “even more so, we should obey the Father of spirits and live!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1007HEB129cl95figs-idiomτῷ Πατρὶ τῶν πνευμάτων1the Father of spiritsThe idiom **Father of spirits** contrasts with **fathers of our flesh** earlier in this verse. Alternate translation: “our spiritual Father” or “our Father in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1008HEB129pem8καὶ ζήσομεν1and liveAlternate translation: “so that we will live”
1009HEB1210l1a3figs-metaphorεἰς τὸ μεταλαβεῖν τῆς ἁγιότητος αὐτοῦ1so that we can share in his holinessThis metaphor speaks of **holiness** as if it were an object that can be shared among people. Alternate translation: “so that we may become holy as God is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1010HEB1211g13efigs-metaphorκαρπὸν εἰρηνικὸν…ἀποδίδωσιν δικαιοσύνης1it produces the peaceful fruit of righteousnessHere, **fruit** here is a metaphor for “result” or “outcome.” Alternate translation: “it produces the peaceful result of righteousness” or “it produces righteousness, which results in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1011HEB1211xbg8figs-personificationτοῖς δι’ αὐτῆς γεγυμνασμένοις1who have been trained by itThe discipline or correction done by the Lord is spoken of as if it were the Lord himself. Alternate translation: “for those who have been trained by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1012HEB1211gaorfigs-activepassiveτοῖς δι’ αὐτῆς γεγυμνασμένοις1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whom God has trained by disciplining them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1013HEB1212cvp9figs-metaphorτὰς παρειμένας χεῖρας, καὶ τὰ παραλελυμένα γόνατα, ἀνορθώσατε1strengthen your hands that hang down and your weak knees.Possibly this continues the metaphor about the race in [Hebrews 12:1](../12/01.md). It is in this way that the author speaks about living as Christians and helping others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1014HEB1213yi9nfigs-metaphorτροχιὰς ὀρθὰς ποιεῖτε τοῖς ποσὶν ὑμῶν1Make straight paths for your feetPossibly this continues the metaphor about the race in [Hebrews 12:1](../12/01.md). It is in this way that the author speaks about living as Christians and helping others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1015HEB1213qmq7figs-metaphorτροχιὰς ὀρθὰς1straight pathsLiving so as to honor and please God is spoken of as if it were a **straight** path to follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1016HEB1213i19dfigs-metaphorμὴ τὸ χωλὸν ἐκτραπῇ1what is lame will not be sprainedIn this metaphor of running a race, **lame** represents another person in the race who is hurt and wants to quit. This, in turn, represent the Christians themselves. Alternate translation: “whoever is weak and wants to quit will not sprain his ankle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1017HEB1213euf9figs-metaphorμὴ…ἐκτραπῇ1will not be sprainedSomeone who stops obeying God is spoken of as if he injured his foot or ankle on a path. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1018HEB1213c8e5figs-activepassiveμὴ…ἐκτραπῇ1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “will not sprain his ankle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1019HEB1213wq18figs-activepassiveἰαθῇ δὲ μᾶλλον1rather be healedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “but instead become strong” or “but instead God will heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1020HEB1214g22efigs-metaphorεἰρήνην διώκετε μετὰ πάντων1Here, **peace** is spoken of as if it were something that a person must chase after. Alternate translation: “Seek to be at peace with everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1021HEB1214h45rfigs-abstractnounsεἰρήνην διώκετε μετὰ πάντων1Pursue peace with everyoneYou can translate the abstract noun **peace** with an adverb. Alternate translation: “Try to live peacefully with everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1022HEB1214pa9afigs-doublenegativesκαὶ τὸν ἁγιασμόν, οὗ χωρὶς οὐδεὶς ὄψεται τὸν Κύριον1also the holiness without which no one will see the LordYou can express the double negative **without … no one** as a positive encouragement. Alternate translation: “also work hard to be holy, because only holy people will see the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1023HEB1214v9z7figs-ellipsisκαὶ τὸν ἁγιασμόν1also the holinessYou can state clearly the understood information. Alternate translation: “also pursue the holiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1024HEB1215at8jfigs-doublenegativesμή τις ὑστερῶν ἀπὸ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ1no one lacks Gods graceYou can state the double negative **no one … lacking** in positive form. Alternate translation: “everyone receives enough of Gods grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1025HEB1215nh7gfigs-metaphorμή τις ῥίζα πικρίας ἄνω φύουσα ἐνοχλῇ, καὶ δι’ αὐτῆς μιανθῶσιν πολλοί1that no root of bitterness grows up to cause trouble, so that many do not become polluted by itHateful or resentful attitudes are spoken of as if they were a plant that is bitter to the taste. Alternate translation: “that no one becomes like a bitter root, which when it grows causes trouble and harms many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1026HEB1216b6efἨσαῦ1**Esau**, who was told about in the writings of Moses, was Isaacs first son and Jacobs brother.
1027HEB1217j6x8figs-activepassiveἀπεδοκιμάσθη1he was rejectedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “his father, Isaac, refused to bless him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1028HEB1217d6hefigs-abstractnounsμετανοίας γὰρ τόπον οὐχ εὗρεν1because he found no opportunity for repentanceYou can translate the abstract noun **repentance** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because it was not possible for him to repent” or “because it was not possible for him to change his decision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1029HEB1217b7k3καίπερ μετὰ δακρύων ἐκζητήσας αὐτήν1even though he sought it with tearsHere, **he** refers to Esau.
1030HEB1218xti40Connecting Statement:The author gives a contrast between what believers in Moses time had while living under the law and what present day believers have after coming to Jesus under the new covenant. He illustrates the experience of the Israelites by describing how God appeared to them at Mount Sinai.
1031HEB1218y1edοὐ…προσεληλύθατε1Here, **you** refers to the Hebrew believers to whom the author wrote.
1032HEB1218a43lfigs-explicitοὐ γὰρ προσεληλύθατε, ψηλαφωμένῳ1For you have not come to a mountain that can be touchedYou can state the implicit information explicitly. Alternate translation: “For you have not come, as the people of Israel came, to a mountain that can be touched” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1033HEB1218w6j6figs-activepassiveοὐ…ψηλαφωμένῳ1that can be touchedThis means that believers in Christ have not come to a physical mountain like Mount Sinai that a person can touch. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you have not come a mountain that you can touch” or “ you have not come a mountain that you can perceive with your senses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1034HEB1219x2qkfigs-metonymyκαὶ φωνῇ ῥημάτων, ἧς οἱ ἀκούσαντες παρῃτήσαντο, μὴ προστεθῆναι αὐτοῖς λόγον1nor to a voice that speaks words whose hearers begged that not another word be spoken to themHere, **voice** refers to someone speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1035HEB1219a9uhfigs-activepassiveκαὶ φωνῇ ῥημάτων, ἧς οἱ ἀκούσαντες παρῃτήσαντο, μὴ προστεθῆναι αὐτοῖς λόγον1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “or where God was speaking in such a way that those who heard him begged him not to speak another word to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1036HEB1220p7qufigs-activepassiveτὸ διαστελλόμενον1what was commandedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what God commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1037HEB1220x31xfigs-activepassiveλιθοβοληθήσεται1it must be stonedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you must stone it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1038HEB1222r9dzfigs-metaphorΣιὼν Ὄρει1Mount ZionThe writer speaks of **Mount Zion**, the location of the Temple in Jerusalem, as if it were heaven itself, the residence of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1039HEB1222k1kvμυριάσιν ἀγγέλων1tens of thousands of angelsAlternate translation: “to an uncountable number of angels”
1040HEB1223j94efigs-metaphorπρωτοτόκων1the firstbornHere, **the firstborn** is plural and speaks of believers in Christ as if they were firstborn sons. This emphasizes their special place and privilege as Gods people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1041HEB1223km4afigs-activepassiveἀπογεγραμμένων ἐν οὐρανοῖς1registered in heavenIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whose names God has written in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1042HEB1223i7qbfigs-activepassiveτετελειωμένων1who have been made perfectIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whom God has made perfect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1043HEB1224kq1vδιαθήκης νέας μεσίτῃ1the mediator of a new covenantThis means **Jesus** caused the **new covenant** between God and humans to exist. See how you translated this phrase in [Hebrews 9:15](../09/15.md).
1044HEB1224nz8lfigs-personificationαἵματι ῥαντισμοῦ, κρεῖττον λαλοῦντι παρὰ τὸν Ἂβελ1the sprinkled blood that speaks better than Abels bloodThe **blood** of Jesus and the blood of Abel are spoken of as if they were people calling out. Alternate translation: “to the sprinkled blood of Jesus that says better things than the blood of Abel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1045HEB1224w9jjτὸν Ἂβελ1Abel was the son of the first man and woman, Adam and Eve. Cain, also their son, murdered Abel.
1046HEB1224z7uqfigs-metonymyαἵματι ῥαντισμοῦ1bloodHere, **blood** stands for Jesus death, as Abels blood stands for his death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1047HEB1225c9cn0Connecting Statement:Having contrasted the Israelites experience at Mount Sinai with the believers experience after Christ died, the writer reminds believers that they have the same God who warns them today. This is the fifth main warning given to believers.
1048HEB1225pnn5figs-youμὴ παραιτήσησθε1The word **you** continues to refer to believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1049HEB1225nnk9figs-doublenegativesμὴ παραιτήσησθε τὸν λαλοῦντα1you do not refuse the one who is speakingYou can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “you pay attention to the one who is speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1050HEB1225eltrfigs-exclusiveἡμεῖς1The word **we** continues to refer to the writer and the readers who are believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1051HEB1225gkn1figs-explicitεἰ…ἐκεῖνοι οὐκ ἐξέφυγον1if they did not escapeYou can state the implicit information explicitly. Alternate translation: “if the people of Israel did not escape judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1052HEB1225fy9uἐπὶ γῆς…τὸν χρηματίζοντα1the one who warned them on earthThis could refer to: (1) Moses, who warned them here **on earth**. (2) God, who warned them at Mount Sinai.
1053HEB1225s5ljfigs-metaphorἡμεῖς οἱ τὸν ἀπ’ οὐρανῶν ἀποστρεφόμενοι1if we turn away from the one who is warningRejecting God is spoken of as if a person were changing direction and **turn away from** him. Alternate translation: “if we reject the one who is warning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1054HEB1226rf4eοὗ ἡ φωνὴ τὴν γῆν ἐσάλευσεν τότε1his voice shook the earthAlternate translation: “when God spoke at that time, the sound of his voice caused the earth to shake”
1055HEB1226rspcἔτι ἅπαξ ἐγὼ σείσω, οὐ μόνον τὴν γῆν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸν οὐρανόν1This quotation is from the prophet Haggai in the Old Testament.
1056HEB1226i1c8ἐσάλευσεν…σείσω1shook … shakeTranslate **shook** and **shake** with words for what an earthquake does when it moves the ground. This refers back to [Hebrews 12:18-21](./18.md) and what happened when the people saw the mountain where Moses received the law from God.
1057HEB1227z6ysfigs-abstractnounsδηλοῖ τῶν σαλευομένων μετάθεσιν1mean the removal of those things that can be shaken, that is, of the thingsYou can translate the abstract noun **removal** with the verbal phrase “take away.” Alternate translation: “to the taking away of the things that can be shaken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1058HEB1227dnpifigs-activepassiveδηλοῖ τῶν σαλευομένων μετάθεσιν, ὡς πεποιημένων1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “means that God will remove the things that he can shake, that is, the things that he created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1059HEB1227l29rτῶν σαλευομένων1shakenTranslate **shaken** with the word for what an earthquake does when it moves the ground. This refers back to [Hebrews 12:18-21](./18.md) and what happened when the people saw the mountain where Moses received the law from God. See how you translated “shook” and “shake” in [Hebrews 12:26](../12/26.md).
1060HEB1227s3xtfigs-activepassiveπεποιημένων1that have been createdIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “of what God has created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1061HEB1227ta84figs-activepassiveτὰ μὴ σαλευόμενα1the things that cannot be shakenIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that do not shake” or “the things that cannot shake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1062HEB1228m44cgrammar-connect-words-phrasesβασιλείαν ἀσάλευτον παραλαμβάνοντες1receiving a kingdomYou can add the words **because we are** to make clear the logical connection between this statement and the next statement. Alternate translation: “because we are receiving an unshakeable kingdom” or “because God is making us members of his kingdom which cannot be shaken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1063HEB1228btf6ἔχωμεν χάριν1let us be gratefulAlternate translation: “let us give thanks”
1064HEB1228f382figs-doubletμετὰ εὐλαβείας καὶ δέους1with reverence and aweThe words **reverence** and **awe** share similar meanings and emphasize the greatness of reverence due to God. Alternate translation: “with great respect and dread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1065HEB1229f899figs-metaphorὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν πῦρ καταναλίσκον1our God is a consuming fire**God** is spoken of here as if he were a **fire** that can burn up anything. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1066HEB13introc8gg0# Hebrews 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The author finishes the list of exhortations he began in chapter 12. Then he asks the readers to pray for him and ends the letter.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:6, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Hospitality<br><br>God wants his people to invite other people to come to their homes to eat food and even to sleep. His people should do this even if they do not know well the people they are inviting. In the Old Testament, Abraham and his nephew Lot both showed hospitality to people they did not know. Abraham served a costly meal to them, and then Lot invited them to sleep in his house. They learned later that those people were actually angels.
1067HEB131sf1n0Connecting Statement:In this closing section, the author gives specific instructions to believers on how they are supposed to live.
1068HEB131g819ἡ φιλαδελφία μενέτω1Let brotherly love continueAlternate translation: “Continue to show your love for other believers as you would for members of your family”
1069HEB132rh7rfigs-litotesμὴ ἐπιλανθάνεσθε1Do not forgetYou can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “Be sure to remember” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1070HEB132y7cdφιλοξενίας1hospitalityAlternate translation: “to welcome and show kindness to strangers”
1071HEB133mx5rfigs-activepassiveὡς συνδεδεμένοι1as if you were bound with themIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as if someone tied you to them” or “as if you were in prison with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1072HEB133d3zefigs-activepassiveτῶν κακουχουμένων1who are mistreatedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and those whom others are mistreating” or “and those who are suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1073HEB133g4apfigs-activepassiveὡς καὶ αὐτοὶ ὄντες ἐν σώματι1as if you also were them in the bodyThis phrase encourages believers to think about other peoples suffering as they would think about their own suffering. Alternate translation: “as if you were the one suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1074HEB134ix27figs-activepassiveτίμιος ὁ γάμος ἐν πᾶσιν1Let marriage be respected by everyoneIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Everyone should consider that marriage is a good and honorable thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1075HEB134ix79figs-euphemismἡ κοίτη ἀμίαντος1Let the marriage bed be pureHere, **the marriage bed** is a polite way to refer to the act of sexual union of a married couple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1076HEB134aokvfigs-metonymyἡ κοίτη ἀμίαντος1This refers to the act of sexual union as if it were only the bed of a married couple. Alternate translation: “let husbands and wives honor their marriage relationship to one another and not sleep with other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1077HEB135sz35figs-metonymyἀφιλάργυρος ὁ τρόπος1Let your conduct be free from the love of moneyHere, **conduct** refers to a persons character or the way he lives, and **free from the love of money** refers to not greatly desiring to have more money. A person who loves money is not content with the amount of money he has. Alternate translation: “Let your conduct not be affected by the love of money” or “Do not greatly wish to have more money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1078HEB136c8w6figs-explicitΚύριος ἐμοὶ βοηθός, καὶ οὐ φοβηθήσομαι; τί ποιήσει μοι ἄνθρωπος?1The Lord is my helper … do to meThis is a quotation from the book of Psalms in the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1079HEB136q8iefigs-rquestionτί ποιήσει μοι ἄνθρωπος?1I will not be afraid. What can a man do to me?The author uses a question to emphasize that he does not fear people because God is helping him. Alternate translation: “I will not fear what a man can do to me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1080HEB136bt0zfigs-gendernotationsτί ποιήσει μοι ἄνθρωπος?1Here, **man** means any person in general. Alternate translation: “What can another person do to me?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1081HEB137ym9mτὴν ἔκβασιν τῆς ἀναστροφῆς1the result of their conductAlternate translation: “the outcome of the way they behave”
1082HEB137tvu6figs-metonymyμιμεῖσθε τὴν πίστιν1Imitate their faithHere the trust in God and the way of life led by these leaders are spoken of as **their faith**. Alternate translation: “trust and obey God in the same way they do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1083HEB138dv5gfigs-metonymyἐχθὲς καὶ σήμερον, ὁ αὐτός, καὶ εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας1is the same yesterday, today, and foreverHere, **yesterday** means all times in the past. Alternate translation: “is the same in the past, the present, and in the future forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1084HEB139y92c0General Information:This section refers to animal sacrifices made by believers in God in Old Testament times, which covered their sins temporarily until the death of Christ came about.
1085HEB139dp5wfigs-metaphorδιδαχαῖς ποικίλαις καὶ ξέναις, μὴ παραφέρεσθε1Do not be carried away by various strange teachingsBeing persuaded by **various and strange teachings** is spoken of as if a person were being carried away by a force. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Do not be persuaded by various and strange teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1086HEB139nbb3figs-activepassiveδιδαχαῖς ποικίλαις καὶ ξέναις, μὴ παραφέρεσθε1If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Do not let others persuade you to believe their various strange teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1087HEB139fe6iδιδαχαῖς ποικίλαις καὶ ξέναις1various strange teachingsAlternate translation: “by many, different teachings that are not the good news we told you”
1088HEB139tmt1figs-activepassiveκαλὸν…χάριτι βεβαιοῦσθαι τὴν καρδίαν, οὐ βρώμασιν, ἐν οἷς οὐκ ὠφελήθησαν οἱ περιπατοῦντες1it is good that the heart should be strengthened by grace, not by foods that do not help those who walk by themIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we become stronger when we think of how God has been kind to us, but we do not become stronger by obeying rules about food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1089HEB139t28ufigs-metonymyβεβαιοῦσθαι τὴν καρδίαν1the heart should be strengthenedHere, **heart** is a metonym for the “inner being.” Alternate translation: “we should be strengthened inwardly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1090HEB139ar93figs-metonymyβρώμασιν1foodsHere, **foods** stands for rules about food. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1091HEB139kf3bfigs-metaphorοἱ περιπατοῦντες1those who walk by themLiving is spoken of as if it were walking. Alternate translation: “those who live by them” or “those who regulate their lives by them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1092HEB1310jjy3figs-metonymyἔχομεν θυσιαστήριον1We have an altarHere, **altar** stands for “place of worship.” It also stands for the animals that the priests in the old covenant sacrificed, from which they took meat for themselves and their families. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1093HEB1311luf7figs-activepassiveὧν…εἰσφέρεται ζῴων τὸ αἷμα περὶ ἁμαρτίας εἰς τὰ ἅγια διὰ τοῦ ἀρχιερέως1the blood of the animals killed for sins is brought by the high priest into the holy placeIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the high priest brings into the holy place the blood of the animals that the priests killed for sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1094HEB1311iv19figs-activepassiveτούτων τὰ σώματα κατακαίεται1while their bodies are burnedIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “while the priests burn the animals bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1095HEB1311f7nbἔξω τῆς παρεμβολῆς1outside the campAlternate translation: “away from where the people lived”
1096HEB1312x48h0Connecting Statement:There is a comparison here between Jesus sacrifice and the tabernacle sacrifices of the Old Testament.
1097HEB1312fw9gδιὸ1SoAlternate translation: “In the same way” or “Because the bodies of the sacrifices were burned outside the camp” ([Hebrews 13:11](../13/11.md))
1098HEB1312eq6tfigs-metonymyἔξω τῆς πύλης1outside the city gateHere, **outside the gate** stands for “outside the city.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1099HEB1313zf8vfigs-metaphorτοίνυν ἐξερχώμεθα πρὸς αὐτὸν ἔξω τῆς παρεμβολῆς1Let us therefore go to him outside the campObeying Jesus is spoken of as if a person were leaving **the camp** to go out where Jesus is. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1100HEB1313h3j4figs-metaphorτὸν ὀνειδισμὸν αὐτοῦ φέροντες1bearing his shameHere, **reproach** is spoken of as if it were an object that had to be carried in ones hands or on ones back. Alternate translation: “while allowing others to insult us just like people insulted him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1101HEB1314u2wnἐπιζητοῦμεν1looking forAlternate translation: “we are waiting for”
1102HEB1315zfy9figs-metaphorθυσίαν αἰνέσεως1a sacrifice of praiseHere, **praise** is spoken of as if it were a **sacrifice** of animals or incense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1103HEB1315b4p1figs-metaphorαἰνέσεως διὰ παντὸς τῷ Θεῷ, τοῦτ’ ἔστιν καρπὸν χειλέων ὁμολογούντων τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ1praise that is the fruit of lips that acknowledge his nameHere, **praise** is spoken of as if it were **fruit** produced by the **lips** of people. Alternate translation: “praise to God in every situation that is produced by the lips of those who acknowledge his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1104HEB1315zr2dfigs-synecdocheχειλέων ὁμολογούντων τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ1lips that acknowledge his nameHere, **lips** represents people who speak. Alternate translation: “the lips of those who acknowledge his name” or “those who acknowledge his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1105HEB1315v52xfigs-metonymyτῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ1his nameA persons **name** represents that person. Alternate translation: “him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1106HEB1316ma8cfigs-litotesτῆς…εὐποιΐας καὶ κοινωνίας μὴ ἐπιλανθάνεσθε1Let us not forget doing good and helping one anotherYou can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “let us always remember to do good and to help others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1107HEB1316kp76figs-metaphorτοιαύταις…θυσίαις1with such sacrificesDoing good and helping others is spoken of as if they were **sacrifices** on an altar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1108HEB1317n5e8figs-metaphorἀγρυπνοῦσιν ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν1keep watch over your soulsThe believers **souls**, that is, the believers spiritual well-being, are spoken of as if they were objects or animals that guards could **keep watch over**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1109HEB1317z2ypfigs-metonymyμὴ στενάζοντες1not with groaningHere, **groaning** stands for sadness or grief. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1110HEB1318d5hf0Connecting Statement:The author closes with a blessing and greetings.
1111HEB1318xmh1figs-exclusiveπροσεύχεσθε περὶ ἡμῶν1Pray for usHere, **us** refers to the author and his companions, but not to the readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1112HEB1318n6gbfigs-metaphorπειθόμεθα…ὅτι καλὴν συνείδησιν ἔχομεν1we are persuaded that we have a clean conscienceHere, **good conscience** stands for being free from guilt. Alternate translation: “we are certain that we have no guilt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1113HEB1319cg4lfigs-activepassiveἵνα τάχειον ἀποκατασταθῶ ὑμῖν1that I will be returned to you soonerIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God will quickly remove the things that stop my coming to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1114HEB1320n66eδὲ1Now**Now** marks a new section of the letter. Here the author praises God and gives a final prayer for his readers.
1115HEB1320d8yqὁ ἀναγαγὼν ἐκ νεκρῶν τὸν Ποιμένα τῶν προβάτων τὸν μέγαν…τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν1brought back from the dead the great shepherd of the sheep, our Lord JesusAlternate translation: “raised the great shepherd of the sheep, our Lord Jesus, to life”
1116HEB1320k6n6ἐκ νεκρῶν1from the deadHere, **the dead** describes all dead people together in the underworld. To bring someone up from among them speaks of causing that person to become alive again.
1117HEB1320gn9wfigs-metaphorτὸν Ποιμένα τῶν προβάτων τὸν μέγαν1the great shepherd of the sheepChrist in his role of leader and protector of those who believe in him is spoken of as if he were a **shepherd** of **sheep**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1118HEB1320qxb8figs-metonymyἐν αἵματι διαθήκης αἰωνίου1by the blood of the eternal covenantHere, **blood** stands for the death of Jesus, which is the basis for the **covenant** that will last forever between God and all believers in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1119HEB1321qj79καταρτίσαι ὑμᾶς ἐν παντὶ ἀγαθῷ, εἰς τὸ ποιῆσαι τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ1equip you with everything good to do his willAlternate translation: “may he give you every good thing you need in order to do his will” or “may he make you capable of doing every good thing according to his will”
1120HEB1321r3mifigs-exclusiveποιῶν ἐν ἡμῖν1working in usThe word **us** refers to the author and the readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1121HEB1321u6iqᾧ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων1to whom be the glory foreverAlternate translation: “whom all people will praise forever”
1122HEB1322wa9rδὲ1Now**Now** marks a new section of the letter. Here the author gives his final comments to his audience.
1123HEB1322b27jfigs-gendernotationsἀδελφοί1brothersHere, **brothers** refers to all the believers to whom the author is writing, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1124HEB1322d5e6ἀνέχεσθε τοῦ λόγου τῆς παρακλήσεως1bear with the word of encouragementAlternate translation: “patiently consider what I have just written to encourage you”
1125HEB1322l8b3figs-metonymyτοῦ λόγου τῆς παρακλήσεως1the word of encouragementHere, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the encouraging message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1126HEB1323w3m2figs-activepassiveἀπολελυμένον1has been set freeIf your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “is no longer in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1127HEB1324r7knἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας1Those from Italy greet youThis could mean: (1) the author is not in **Italy**, but there is a group of believers with him who have come from Italy. (2) the author is in **Italy** while writing this letter.
1128HEB1324kk9ctranslate-namesτῆς Ἰταλίας1Italy**Italy** is the name of a region at that time. At that time, Rome was the capital city of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])